summaryrefslogtreecommitdiff
path: root/17571-h
diff options
context:
space:
mode:
authorRoger Frank <rfrank@pglaf.org>2025-10-15 04:51:25 -0700
committerRoger Frank <rfrank@pglaf.org>2025-10-15 04:51:25 -0700
commitc5b700fc57d8a3a24cee8c3f84a7eb1d97c5d270 (patch)
treee59ed3488d0021ca456e466c32abb032cacb0fac /17571-h
initial commit of ebook 17571HEADmain
Diffstat (limited to '17571-h')
-rw-r--r--17571-h/17571-h.htm8308
-rw-r--r--17571-h/images/image016.jpgbin0 -> 140223 bytes
-rw-r--r--17571-h/images/image020.jpgbin0 -> 63258 bytes
-rw-r--r--17571-h/images/image035.pngbin0 -> 114878 bytes
-rw-r--r--17571-h/images/image039.pngbin0 -> 142550 bytes
-rw-r--r--17571-h/images/image082.pngbin0 -> 16404 bytes
-rw-r--r--17571-h/images/image119.jpgbin0 -> 40969 bytes
-rw-r--r--17571-h/images/image120.jpgbin0 -> 22859 bytes
-rw-r--r--17571-h/images/image121.jpgbin0 -> 21399 bytes
-rw-r--r--17571-h/images/image136.jpgbin0 -> 42874 bytes
-rw-r--r--17571-h/images/image137.pngbin0 -> 26207 bytes
-rw-r--r--17571-h/images/image176.pngbin0 -> 50875 bytes
-rw-r--r--17571-h/images/imagetitle.pngbin0 -> 478 bytes
-rw-r--r--17571-h/images/original020.jpgbin0 -> 292961 bytes
-rw-r--r--17571-h/images/original035.jpgbin0 -> 149570 bytes
-rw-r--r--17571-h/images/original039.jpgbin0 -> 173836 bytes
16 files changed, 8308 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/17571-h/17571-h.htm b/17571-h/17571-h.htm
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..cc5bd07
--- /dev/null
+++ b/17571-h/17571-h.htm
@@ -0,0 +1,8308 @@
+<!DOCTYPE html
+ PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Strict//EN"
+ "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-strict.dtd">
+<html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xml:lang="en" lang="en">
+ <head>
+ <meta http-equiv="content-type" content="text/html; charset=utf-8" />
+ <title>
+ The Project Gutenberg eBook of Piano Tuning, by J. Cree
+ Fischer.
+ </title>
+ <style type="text/css">
+
+ p { margin-top: .75em; text-align: justify; margin-bottom: .75em; }
+ h1,h2,h3,h4,h5,h6 { text-align: center; clear: both; }
+ hr { width: 25%; margin-top: 2em; margin-bottom: 1em; margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;
+ clear: both;
+ }
+ ul { list-style: none; }
+ table {margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto; font-size: small;}
+ body{margin-left: 10%; margin-right: 10%; }
+ .linenum {position: absolute; top: auto; left: 4%;} /* poetry number */
+ .blockquot{margin-left: 5%; margin-right: 10%;}
+ .pagenum {position: absolute; left: 92%; font-size: smaller; text-align: right;} /* page numbers */
+ .bb {border-bottom: solid 2px;}
+ .bl {border-left: solid 2px;}
+ .bt {border-top: solid 2px;}
+ .br {border-right: solid 2px;}
+ .break {margin-top: 1em;}
+ .bbox {border: solid 2px;}
+ .ctr {text-align: center;}
+ .center {text-align: center;}
+ .center table { margin: 0 auto; text-align: left; }
+ .smcap {font-variant: small-caps;}
+ .sf {font-size: small;}
+ .center img { margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto; }
+ img {
+ border: none;
+ padding: 6px;
+ }
+ p.caption {text-align: center;
+ margin-top: 0;
+ font-weight: bold;
+ font-variant: small-caps;}
+ .figcenter {margin: auto; text-align: center;}
+ .poem {margin-left:10%; margin-right:10%; text-align: left;}
+ .poem br {display: none;}
+ .poem .stanza {margin: 1em 0em 1em 0em;}
+ .poem span.i0 {display: block; margin-left: 0em; padding-left: 3em; text-indent: -3em;}
+ .poem span.i2 {display: block; margin-left: 2em; padding-left: 3em; text-indent: -3em;}
+ .poem span.i4 {display: block; margin-left: 4em; padding-left: 3em; text-indent: -3em;}
+ .ralign { position: absolute; right: 10%; top: auto;}
+ .footnotes { border: dashed 1px gray; background-color: #EEE; color: black; padding: 0 1em 1em 1em; }
+ .footnotes h3 { text-align:center; margin-top: 0.5em; font-weight:normal; font-size:90%;}
+ .footnote { font-size: .9em;}
+ .footnote .label { float:left; text-align:left; width:2em; }
+ .fnanchor { font-size: .8em; text-decoration: none; vertical-align: super;}
+ ins.corr {
+ text-decoration:none;
+ border-bottom: thin dotted gray;
+ }
+
+ </style>
+ </head>
+ <body>
+
+
+<pre>
+
+The Project Gutenberg EBook of Piano Tuning, by J. Cree Fischer
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+
+Title: Piano Tuning
+ A Simple and Accurate Method for Amateurs
+
+Author: J. Cree Fischer
+
+Release Date: January 22, 2006 [EBook #17571]
+
+Language: English
+
+Character set encoding: UTF-8
+
+*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK PIANO TUNING ***
+
+
+
+
+Produced by Mark C. Orton, L.N. Yaddanapudi and the Online
+Distributed Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net
+
+
+
+
+
+
+</pre>
+
+ <div class="center">
+ <img src="images/imagetitle.png" width="117" height="100"
+ alt="" title="" />
+ </div>
+ <h2>
+ J. CREE FISCHER
+ </h2>
+ <h1>
+ <span class="bb bt">PIANO TUNING</span>
+ </h1>
+ <h3>
+ A SIMPLE AND ACCURATE METHOD FOR AMATEURS
+ </h3>
+ <h4>
+ DOVER PUBLICATIONS, INC. NEW YORK
+ </h4>
+ <p>
+ Copyright &copy; 1907 by Theo. Presser.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ All rights reserved under Pan American and International
+ Copyright Conventions.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ Published in Canada by General Publishing Company, Ltd., 30
+ Lesmill Road, Don Mills, Toronto, Ontario.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ Published in the United Kingdom by Constable and Company,
+ Ltd., 10 Orange Street, London WC 2.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ This Dover edition, first published in 1975, is a
+ republication of the work originally published in
+ Philadelphia in 1907. The following sections have been
+ omitted from the present edition because they were
+ out-of-date: Practical Application of Piano Tuning as a
+ Profession, Business Hints, Ideas in Advertising, and
+ Charges for Services. This edition is reprinted by special
+ arrangement with Theodore Presser Company, Presser Place,
+ Bryn Mawr, Pennsylvania, publisher of the original edition.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ <i>International Standard Book Number: 0-486-23267-0</i>
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ <i>Library of Congress Catalog Card Number: 75-14759</i>
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ Manufactured in the United States of America
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ Dover Publications, Inc.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ 180 Varick Street
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ New York, N.Y. 10014
+ </p>
+ <hr style="width: 65%;" />
+ <p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_i" id="Page_i"></a>[Pg
+ i]</span></p>
+ <h2>
+ <a name="PREFACE" id="PREFACE"></a>PREFACE.
+ </h2>
+ <hr />
+ <p>
+ For some years past a lack of competent men in the
+ profession of Piano Tuning has been generally acknowledged.
+ This may be accounted for as follows: The immense
+ popularity of the piano and the assiduous efforts of
+ factories and salesmen have led to the result that nearly
+ every well-to-do household is furnished with an instrument.
+ To supply this demand the annual production and sale for
+ the year 1906 is estimated at three hundred thousand pianos
+ in the United States. These pianos must be tuned many times
+ in the factory before they are shipped to the salesroom;
+ there they must be kept in tune until sold. When, finally,
+ they take up their permanent abode in the homes of the
+ purchasers, they should be given the attention of the tuner
+ at least twice a year. This means work for the tuner. But
+ this is not all. Presuming that the average life of the
+ piano is about fifty years, it is evident that there exists
+ in this country an accumulation of instruments <span
+ class='pagenum'><a name="Page_ii" id="Page_ii"></a>[Pg
+ ii]</span> variously estimated at from four to five
+ millions. This means <i>more work for tuners</i>.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ While production and accumulation have been increasing,
+ there has been little, if any, effort made to provide
+ tuners to look after the needs of this ever-increasing
+ number of instruments, no provision for the thorough
+ instruction of the learner of Piano Tuning, outside the
+ walls of the factories, and of the few musical colleges
+ where the art is taught. Doubtless there are many persons
+ who are by nature well adapted to this agreeable and
+ profitable occupationpersons who would make earnest effort
+ to acquire the necessary skill and its honest application
+ if they had a favorable opportunity. Musical colleges in
+ which tuning is taught are few and far between; piano
+ factories are built for the purpose of producing pianos and
+ not tuners, for mechanics and laborers and not for teachers
+ and pupils; furthermore, very little fine tuning is done in
+ the factory; rough tuning is the bulk of the work there,
+ and a long apprenticeship in the factory, with its meager
+ advantages, is rarely sufficient to meet the demands of the
+ would-be-thorough tuner. This may account, in part, for the
+ fact that <span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_iii"
+ id="Page_iii"></a>[Pg iii]</span> many who are incompetent
+ are following this profession, and that there is an
+ increasing demand for tuners of skill.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ In view of these facts the author came to the opinion that
+ if a course of instruction were prepared which would
+ demonstrate clearly the many abstruse details of the art in
+ an interesting and comprehensible way, it would be
+ appreciated by those who are desirous to learn. Acting upon
+ this impulse, he began the preparation of such a course.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ The present book is the outgrowth of a course of
+ instruction, used successfully with pupils from various
+ parts of the United States and Canada, conducted partly by
+ correspondence; partly at the school directed by the
+ author. Although it has been necessary to revise the course
+ somewhat for publication in the present form, no essential
+ matter has been omitted and much has been added.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ In preparing this course of study the utmost effort has
+ been made to present the various topics in the clearest,
+ most comprehensive manner, literary excellence being a
+ secondary consideration.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ While the book is designed for self-instruction, the
+ systematic arrangement of the text, and the <span
+ class='pagenum'><a name="Page_iv" id="Page_iv"></a>[Pg
+ iv]</span> review questions with each lesson, suggest its
+ use as a text-book for schools and colleges which give
+ personal training in the care of the piano.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ To the talented individual of either sex who is ambitious
+ to acquire a dignified and profitable profession, to the
+ scientifically-inclined musician who is eager to learn the
+ fundamental principles underlying all musical harmony, and
+ finally to the non-professional who loves to read because
+ of a fondness for science, the book is submitted; if it
+ should prove a boon to the former, a benefit to the second,
+ or a pleasure to the latter, I shall feel rewarded for the
+ work of its preparation.
+ </p>
+ <div class="smcap ralign">
+ The Author.
+ </div>
+ <hr style="width: 65%;" />
+ <p>
+ <span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_v" id="Page_v"></a>[Pg
+ v]</span>
+ </p>
+ <h2>
+ <a name="CONTENTS" id="CONTENTS"></a>CONTENTS.
+ </h2>
+ <hr />
+ <p>
+ <a href="#PREFACE"><b>PREFACE.</b></a><span
+ class="ralign"><a href="#Page_i">i</a></span>
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ <a href="#CONTENTS"><b>CONTENTS.</b></a><span
+ class="ralign"><a href="#Page_v">v</a></span>
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ <a href="#LESSON_I"><b>LESSON I.</b></a><span
+ class="ralign"><a href="#Page_007">7</a></span>
+ </p>
+ <p class="blockquot">
+ Introduction.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ <a href="#LESSON_II"><b>LESSON II.</b></a><span
+ class="ralign"><a href="#Page_011">11</a></span>
+ </p>
+ <p class="blockquot">
+ General Construction of the Piano and Something of its
+ Evolution and History.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ <a href="#LESSON_III"><b>LESSON III.</b></a><span
+ class="ralign"><a href="#Page_020">20</a></span>
+ </p>
+ <p class="blockquot">
+ Technical Names and Uses of the Parts of the Upright
+ Action.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ <a href="#LESSON_IV"><b>LESSON IV.</b></a><span
+ class="ralign"><a href="#Page_032">32</a></span>
+ </p>
+ <p class="blockquot">
+ Action of the Square Piano. Action of the Grand Piano.
+ Instructions for Removing the Square and Grand Piano
+ Actions.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ <a href="#LESSON_V"><b>LESSON V.</b></a><span
+ class="ralign"><a href="#Page_043">43</a></span>
+ </p>
+ <p class="blockquot">
+ Regulating and Repairing. Faults in Pianos aside from the
+ Action and their Remedies. Regulating and Repairing the
+ Upright Action.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ <a href="#LESSON_VI"><b>LESSON VI.</b></a><span
+ class="ralign"><a href="#Page_056">56</a></span>
+ </p>
+ <p class="blockquot">
+ Regulating and Repairing the Square Action. Miscellaneous
+ Repairs.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ <a href="#LESSON_VII"><b>LESSON VII.</b></a><span
+ class="ralign"><a href="#Page_066">66</a></span>
+ </p>
+ <p class="blockquot">
+ The Study and Practice of Piano Tuning.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ <a href="#LESSON_VIII"><b>LESSON VIII.</b></a><span
+ class="ralign"><a href="#Page_072">72</a></span>
+ </p>
+ <p class="blockquot">
+ The Temperament. Beats, Waves, Pulsations. The New System
+ of Temperament. The Octave. The Fifth. Pitch. Diagram of
+ the Fischer System of Temperament.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ <a href="#LESSON_IX"><b>LESSON IX.</b></a><span
+ class="ralign"><a href="#Page_085">85</a></span>
+ </p>
+ <p class="blockquot">
+ Specific Instructions in Setting Temperament. The
+ Continuous Mute.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ <a href="#LESSON_X"><b>LESSON X.</b></a><span
+ class="ralign"><a href="#Page_097">97</a></span>
+ </p>
+ <p class="blockquot">
+ Theory of the Temperament. Equal Temperament. Unequal
+ Temperament.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ <a href="#LESSON_XI"><b>LESSON XI.</b></a><span
+ class="ralign"><a href="#Page_109">109</a></span>
+ </p>
+ <p class="blockquot">
+ Technique or Modus Operandi in Piano Tuning. Manipulation
+ of the Tuning Hammer. Setting the Mutes or Wedges in the
+ Upright Piano. Setting the Mutes or Wedges in the Square
+ Piano.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ <a href="#LESSON_XII"><b>LESSON XII.</b></a><span
+ class="ralign"><a href="#Page_126">126</a></span><span
+ class='pagenum'><a name="Page_vi" id="Page_vi"></a>[Pg
+ vi]</span>
+ </p>
+ <p class="blockquot">
+ Mathematics of the Tempered Scale. Rationale of the
+ Temperament. Proposition I.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ <a href="#LESSON_XIII"><b>LESSON XIII.</b></a><span
+ class="ralign"><a href="#Page_139">139</a></span>
+ </p>
+ <p class="blockquot">
+ Rationale of the Temperament, Concluded. Proposition II.
+ Proposition III. Numerical Comparison of the Diatonic with
+ the Tempered Scale. Various Mathematical Tables and
+ Examples.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ <a href="#LESSON_XIV"><b>LESSON XIV.</b></a><span
+ class="ralign"><a href="#Page_150">150</a></span>
+ </p>
+ <p class="blockquot">
+ Miscellaneous Topics Pertaining to the Practical Work of
+ Tuning. Cause of the Beats. Finishing up the Temperament.
+ Tuning the Treble. Tuning the Bass. False Waves.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ <a href="#LESSON_XV"><b>LESSON XV.</b></a><span
+ class="ralign"><a href="#Page_163">163</a></span>
+ </p>
+ <p class="blockquot">
+ Miscellaneous Items Pertaining to the Practical Work of
+ Tuning, Regulating, and Repairing. Comparison of the
+ Different Systems of Temperament. System A. System B.
+ System C. Final Inspection. Loose Pins. Split Bridges.
+ Stringing. Wire Splicing.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ <a href="#LESSON_XVI"><b>LESSON XVI.</b></a><span
+ class="ralign"><a href="#Page_178">178</a></span>
+ </p>
+ <p class="blockquot">
+ Tuning and Repairing the Reed Organ. Cleaning. Stops.
+ Examination. Sticking Keys. Leaks. Pedal Defects.
+ Sympathetic Vibrations. Tuning.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ <a href="#LESSON_XVII"><b>LESSON XVII.</b></a><span
+ class="ralign"><a href="#Page_193">193</a></span>
+ </p>
+ <p class="blockquot">
+ Concluding Professional Hints. Peculiar Expressions Used in
+ Designating Qualities of Tone. Questions often Asked the
+ Piano Tuner. Seasons for Tuning.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ <a href="#INDEX"><b>INDEX.</b></a><span class="ralign"><a
+ href="#Page_199">199</a></span>
+ </p>
+ <hr style="width: 65%;" />
+ <p>
+ <span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_007"
+ id="Page_007"></a>[Pg 007]</span>
+ </p>
+ <h2>
+ <a name="LESSON_I" id="LESSON_I"></a>LESSON I.
+ </h2>
+ <hr style="width: 25%;" />
+ <h3>
+ INTRODUCTION.
+ </h3>
+ <p>
+ Undoubtedly every human being is fitted for some sphere of
+ usefulnesssome industry by which he can benefit mankind and
+ support himself in comfort. Just what we are fitted for
+ must, almost invariably, be decided by ourselves; and the
+ sooner the better, else we may plod among the thousands
+ whose lives are miserable failures for the reason that
+ "they have missed their calling."
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ In the consideration of Piano Tuning as a profession, one
+ should first determine if he possesses the necessary
+ qualifications, the most important of which are a musical
+ ear and some degree of mechanical ability. Having these,
+ all else may be acquired by study. It is not necessary to
+ possess a musical education or to be a musician; although a
+ knowledge of music will be found a great aid. Still, an
+ elementary <span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_008"
+ id="Page_008"></a>[Pg 008]</span>knowledge of the
+ principles of music is a necessity to the student of this
+ course, as it has been found impossible to avoid the use of
+ a few technical terms. In most cases, however, they are set
+ forth in such a way that they will be readily apprehended
+ by anyone who has even a slight knowledge of the
+ fundamental principles of music.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ In teaching Piano Tuning, it is the custom of the "Central
+ School of Piano Tuning," for which these lessons were
+ originally prepared, to have all students prepare two
+ lessons in harmony as a test of their acquaintance with the
+ intervals and chords used in tuning. The lessons are not
+ difficult, and they embody only those principles which are
+ essential to the proper understanding of the key-board: the
+ intervals of the diatonic scale and the major common chord
+ in the twelve different keys, C, D, E, F, G, A, B, B-flat,
+ D-flat, E-flat, G-flat, and A-flat. In connection with the
+ harmony lessons, we use as a text-book "Clarke's
+ Harmony,"<a id="fnanchor_A" name="fnanchor_A"></a><a
+ href="#fn_A" class="fnanchor">[A]</a> and the student is
+ required to master the first two chapters and prepare
+ manuscripts upon each of the lessons. Below is a number
+ <span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_009"
+ id="Page_009"></a>[Pg 009]</span>of the most important
+ questions selected from those lessons upon which
+ manuscripts have been written:
+ </p>
+ <div class="blockquot sf">
+ <p>
+ 1. Every white key on the piano represents an "absolute
+ pitch." By what names are these pitches known? How are
+ the black keys named?
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ 2. How many tones constitute the diatonic scale? Give
+ numerical names.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ 3. Intervals are measured by steps and half-steps. How
+ many steps from 1 to 3 in the diatonic scale? 1 to 4? 1
+ to 5? 3 to 5? 5 to 8? 1 to 8?
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ 4. Why is there no black key between E and F, and between
+ B and C?
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ 5. From 1 to 3 is called an interval of a third; from 3
+ to 5, also a third; from 1 to 5, a fifth: they are so
+ called because they include, respectively, three and five
+ members of the diatonic scale. What is the interval 3 to
+ 6? 2 to 5? 5 to 8? 2 to 6? 1 to 8?
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ 6. Thirds are of two kinds: major (larger) thirds embrace
+ two whole-steps; minor (smaller) thirds embrace a step
+ and a half. What kind of a third is 1-3 in the diatonic
+ scale? 2-4? 3-5? 6-8?
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ 7. What do we mean by the term, Fundamental of a chord?
+ What is added to it to complete the common chord?
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ 8. What absolute pitches comprise the common chord of C?
+ What kind of interval between the first two members? What
+ between the first and last? What between the second and
+ last?
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ 9. What tones would you use if told to strike the common
+ chord of C in four-part, close harmony, using the
+ fundamental for the highest tone?
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ 10. How many keys (white and black) are there between
+ <span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_010"
+ id="Page_010"></a>[Pg 010]</span>the fundamental and the
+ third? How many between the third and the fifth? How many
+ between the fundamental and the fifth when the fifth is
+ played above the fundamental?
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ 11. How many keys (white and black) are there between two
+ keys comprising a perfect fourth?
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ 12. (Most important of all.) What keys of the piano
+ keyboard comprise the common chord founded upon G as the
+ fundamental? Upon F? Upon F&#9839;? Upon G&#9839;? Upon
+ B&#9837;? Upon D&#9837;? Upon E&#9837;? Upon D? Upon E?
+ Upon A? Upon B?
+ </p>
+ </div>
+ <p>
+ If one is able to answer these questions correctly he is
+ qualified to begin the study of Piano Tuning.
+ </p>
+ <hr style="width: 65%;" />
+ <p>
+ <span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_011"
+ id="Page_011"></a>[Pg 011]</span>
+ </p>
+ <h2>
+ <a name="LESSON_II" id="LESSON_II"></a>LESSON II.
+ </h2>
+ <hr style="width: 25%;" />
+ <h3>
+ GENERAL CONSTRUCTION OF THE PIANO; SOMETHING OF ITS
+ EVOLUTION AND HISTORY.
+ </h3>
+ <p>
+ The piano of today is, unquestionably, the most perfect,
+ and consequently the most popular and beloved of all
+ musical instruments.
+ </p>
+ <div class="poem">
+ <div class="stanza">
+ <span class="i0">That enchanting Queen of the home,<br />
+ </span> <span class="i2">Whose place in the hearts of the
+ family<br />
+ </span> <span class="i0">Is as dear as though it could
+ speak<br />
+ </span> <span class="i2">In words of joy and
+ sorrow,<br />
+ </span> <span class="i0">Sadness or consolation;<br />
+ </span> <span class="i2">Soothing, animating,
+ enrapturing,<br />
+ </span> <span class="i0">Charming away the soul<br />
+ </span> <span class="i2">From its worldly weight of
+ cares,<br />
+ </span> <span class="i0">And wafting it softly<br />
+ </span> <span class="i2">Into the realm of celestial
+ dreams.<br />
+ </span>
+ </div>
+ </div>
+ <p>
+ The untiring efforts of genius for over a century have
+ succeeded in producing a musical instrument that falls
+ little short of perfection. Yet other inventions and
+ improvements are sure to come, for we are never content
+ with "good enough."
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ <span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_012"
+ id="Page_012"></a>[Pg 012]</span>
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ The student of these lessons may, in his practice, discover
+ defective mechanical action and by his ingenuity be able to
+ improve it; he may likewise see where an improvement can be
+ made in acoustic construction; where a better scale can be
+ drawn; or where different and perhaps new materials may be
+ used for the component parts of the instrument. The
+ possibilities are numerous along these lines, and in
+ addition to bestowing a favor upon the general public, the
+ man who has the originality to produce something new,
+ places himself beyond want.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ The inevitable inference is that the piano is an evolution
+ of the harp principle. This instrument was known centuries
+ previous to the Christian era. From the best history
+ obtainable, we learn that about three hundred years ago,
+ the first effort was made to interpose a mechanical
+ contrivance between the performer and the strings whereby
+ it would only be necessary to strike the keys to produce
+ tone from the strings, thereby decreasing the difficulty in
+ finding the strings and picking them with the fingers, and
+ greatly increasing the possibilities in musical rendition.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ History gives credit to Italy for the first productions of
+ this kind, about 1600 A.D., when the faculty <span
+ class='pagenum'><a name="Page_013" id="Page_013"></a>[Pg
+ 013]</span>of music was beginning to manifest itself more
+ boldly. Scientists saw that wonderful developments were
+ possible, and we have reason to believe that experiments
+ were made in England, France, Germany and all civilized
+ countries about this time, for the production of the
+ instrument which we call, in this day, a Pianoforte.
+ (<i>Piano e forte</i>: soft and loud.)
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ At this time communication between the different countries
+ was, of course, slow and uncertain, and experiments of this
+ kind were probably unknown outside of the immediate
+ neighborhood in which they were tried; therefore, much
+ valuable and interesting history has not come to light.
+ However, from the specimens which we have had the pleasure
+ of seeing, and some of which we have had the opportunity to
+ work on, we infer that about the same line of difficulties
+ presented themselves to all of these early experimenters,
+ most of which were not efficiently overcome until in the
+ last century, and the most important of which it fell to
+ the lot of American inventors to overcome.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ Some of these early instruments were not even provided with
+ dampers for stopping the tone when the key was released;
+ consequently, when a number of <span class='pagenum'><a
+ name="Page_014" id="Page_014"></a>[Pg 014]</span>keys were
+ struck in succession, the tone continued from all, so long
+ as the strings would vibrate. The strings and sound-board
+ being very light, the sustaining qualities were meager
+ compared to those of the modern piano; consequently the
+ dampers were not so much missed as they would be if removed
+ from a modern upright or grand, which would surely render
+ them unfit for use.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ In the first attempts at piano building, the difficulties
+ to be overcome may be enumerated as follows: The frames
+ were not strong enough to resist the tension of the
+ strings; they were made almost entirely of wood which
+ yields to the pull of the strings and is subject to
+ climatic changes; the scale was very imperfect, that is,
+ the length, tension and weight of the strings were not
+ properly proportioned, the result being a different quality
+ of tone from different portions of the keyboard; the
+ actions were either heavy and imperfect, or too light to
+ produce sufficient vibration; the proper point upon the
+ strings for the hammers to strike and for the dampers to
+ bear had not yet been ascertained; the preparation and
+ seasoning of the wood for the different parts of the
+ instrument had not received sufficient attention.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ <span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_015"
+ id="Page_015"></a>[Pg 015]</span>
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ One cannot conceive how difficult it is to produce
+ something that has never existed, until he tries. The
+ requirements necessary to such results as are obtainable
+ from the modern piano are numerous and rigid and the result
+ of many costly experiments.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ Probably the most important essential in piano building is
+ the production of a frame of such strength and stability
+ that the enormous tension of the strings is completely
+ resisted in all parts of the scale. In many of the cheaper
+ pianos of this day, the lack of this essential manifests
+ itself in an annoying degree to the piano tuner. In tuning,
+ the workman "brings up" his temperament in the middle of
+ the instrument; in most cases the temperament stands all
+ right. He next tunes the treble, then the bass; after doing
+ his work perfectly he will often find that the treble fell
+ somewhat while he was bringing up the bass; or, in a few
+ cases, he may find that the treble sharpened, thus showing
+ that there was yielding of the frame. Of course, this
+ defect might be overcome by using an extremely heavy metal
+ plate and wooden frame; but the commercial side of the
+ question, in this day, calls for lightness in the
+ instrument as a check to the expense of production, and,
+ consequently, pianos that <span class='pagenum'><a
+ name="Page_016" id="Page_016"></a>[Pg 016]</span>are "made
+ to sell" are often much too light to fulfil this
+ requirement.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ In the upright piano, the back frame of wood is first made;
+ at the top of this is the pin-block, sometimes called the
+ wrest-plank. This is composed of several layers of wood
+ firmly glued together with the grain running in different
+ directions to prevent splitting and warping. Into this
+ plank the tuning pins are driven. The sound-board is fitted
+ firmly into this frame of wood below the pin-block.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ Next, the strong metal plate is secured to the frame by
+ large bolts and screws. Openings are left in the plate for
+ the bridges, which project from the sound-board beyond the
+ metal plate; also for the tuning pins, action bracket
+ bolts, etc.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ At the lower end of the plate, and just below the
+ bridges,<a id="fnanchor_B" name="fnanchor_B"></a><a
+ href="#fn_B" class="fnanchor">[B]</a> the hitchpins are
+ driven firmly into holes drilled to receive them. Their
+ purpose is to support the lower ends of the strings. The
+ bass strings are separate, and each has a loop with which
+ to fasten it to the hitchpin. In the treble, one piece of
+ wire forms two strings; the two ends are secured to the
+ <span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_017"
+ id="Page_017"></a>[Pg 017]</span>tuning pins above, and the
+ string is simply brought around the hitchpin. The bridges
+ communicating with the sound-board are at the lower end of
+ the sound-board. Notice, there is a portion of the length
+ of each string between the bridge and the hitchpin.
+ </p>
+ <div class="center">
+ <img src="images/image016.jpg"
+ alt="Piano frame" title="Piano frame" />
+ </div>
+ <p>
+ At the upper end of the strings, a "bearing-bar," situated
+ between the tuning pins and upper bridge, is attached to
+ the pin-block by screws which draw it inward; its function
+ is to hold the strings firmly in position. You will notice
+ that the lengths of the strings, above the bearing-bar,
+ vary considerably, even in the three strings comprising the
+ unison. (We will speak of the effect of this in tuning,
+ farther on.)
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ After that portion of the case is completed which forms the
+ key-bed or action frame, we are ready to set in the
+ </p>
+ <p class="center smcap">
+ Action
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ By this is meant the keys and all those intricate parts
+ which convey the motion of the key to the hammers which
+ strike the strings, and the dampers which mute them.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ The requisites of the action are as follows:
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ The keys must descend quickly and easily at the touch of
+ the performer, giving quick response.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ <span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_018"
+ id="Page_018"></a>[Pg 018]</span>
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ The weight of the hammer must be properly proportioned to
+ the strings it causes to vibrate.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ The hammer must rebound after striking the string. (Where
+ the hammer remains against the string, thereby preventing
+ vibration, the term "blocking" is used to designate the
+ fault.)
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ The action must be capable of quick repetition; that is,
+ when a key is struck a number of times in quick succession,
+ it must respond perfectly every time.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ After striking and rebounding from the string, the hammer
+ should not fall to its lowest position where it rests when
+ not in use, as this would prevent quick repetition. For
+ catching the hammer at a short distance from the string, a
+ felted piece of wood suspended on a wire, called the back
+ check, rises when the key is depressed, and returns when
+ the key is released, allowing the hammer to regain its
+ resting position.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ A damper, for stopping the tone of the string when a key is
+ released, must leave the string just before the hammer
+ strikes, and return the instant the key is released.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ A means must be provided for releasing all the dampers from
+ the strings at the will of the performer. <span
+ class='pagenum'><a name="Page_019" id="Page_019"></a>[Pg
+ 019]</span>The loud pedal, as it is called, but more
+ properly, the damper pedal, accomplishes this end by
+ raising the dampers from the strings.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ In the square and the grand piano, the action is under the
+ sound-board, while the strings are over it; so the hammers
+ are made to strike through an opening in the sound-board.
+ In the upright, the strings are between the action and the
+ sound-board; so no opening is necessary in the latter.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ The "trap-action" consists of the pedals and the parts
+ which convey motion to the action proper.
+ </p>
+ <div class="center">
+ QUESTIONS ON LESSON II.
+ </div>
+ <ol>
+ <li>
+ What have been some of the salient obstacles necessary to
+ overcome in producing the perfected piano?
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ Of what use are the dampers? Explain their mechanical
+ action.
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ Mention several of the qualities necessary to a good
+ action.
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ Describe the building of an upright piano.
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ Contrast the musical capacity and peculiar
+ characteristics of the piano with those of the organ,
+ which has the same keyboard.
+ </li>
+ </ol>
+ <hr style="width: 65%;" />
+ <p>
+ <span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_020"
+ id="Page_020"></a>[Pg 020]</span>
+ </p>
+ <h2>
+ <a name="LESSON_III" id="LESSON_III"></a>LESSON III.
+ </h2>
+ <hr style="width: 25%;" />
+ <h3>
+ TECHNICAL NAMES AND USES OF THE PARTS OF THE UPRIGHT PIANO
+ ACTION.
+ </h3>
+ <p>
+ In the practice of piano tuning, the first thing is to
+ ascertain if the action is in first-class condition. The
+ tuner must be able to detect, locate and correct the
+ slightest defect in any portion of the instrument. Any
+ regulating or repairing of the action should be attended to
+ before tuning the instrument; the latter should be the
+ final operation. As a thorough knowledge of regulating and
+ repairing is practically indispensable to the professional
+ tuner, the author has spared neither means, labor nor
+ research to make this part of the lessons very complete,
+ and feels sure that it will meet with the hearty approval
+ of most, if not all, students. The piano tuner who knows
+ nothing of regulating and repairing will miss many an
+ opportunity to earn extra money.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ The illustration accompanying this lesson is from a
+ Wessell, Nickel and Gross Upright action. This <span
+ class='pagenum'><a name="Page_021" id="Page_021"></a>[Pg
+ 021]</span>firm, whose product is considered the acme of
+ perfection, makes nothing but actions. Most manufacturers
+ of pianos, of the present day, build the wooden frame, the
+ sound-board and the case only; the action, metal plate,
+ strings, tuning-pins, etc., being purchased from different
+ firms who make a specialty of the manufacture of these
+ parts. A few concerns, however, make every piece that
+ enters into the composition of the instruments bearing
+ their names.
+ </p>
+ <div class="center">
+ <a href="images/original020.jpg"><img
+ src="images/image020.jpg"
+ alt="Upright piano action"
+ title="Upright piano action" /></a>
+ </div>
+ <p>
+ <i>Ky</i>, is the Key in its resting position.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ <i>c</i>, wherever found, represents a cushion of felt or
+ soft leather upon which the different parts of the action
+ rest or come in contact with each other. Their purpose, as
+ is readily seen, is that of rendering the action noiseless
+ and easy of operation.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ <i>Bnc R</i>, shows the end of the balance rail, extending
+ the entire length of the keyboard.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ <i>B P</i>, is the balance pin. This is a perfectly round
+ pin driven firmly in the balance rail. The bottom of the
+ hole in the key fits closely around the balance pin; at the
+ top, it is the shape of a mortise, parallel with the key,
+ which allows the <span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_022"
+ id="Page_022"></a>[Pg 022]</span>key to move only in the
+ direction intended. The mortise in the wooden cap on top of
+ the key at this point is lined with bushing cloth which
+ holds the key in position laterally, and prevents looseness
+ and rattling, yet allows the key to move easily.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ <i>L</i>, is the lead put in this portion of the key to
+ balance it, and to insure uniformity of "touch," and quick
+ and certain return of key to its rest position. As there is
+ more or less difference in the length of keys, and also in
+ the weight of the hammers operated by them, some keys are
+ leaded much more heavily than others. In some cases the
+ lead is inserted in the extreme back end of the key; in
+ others it is put near the balance rail according to the
+ requirement. In some actions the lead is omitted entirely;
+ but in the best actions it is almost invariably present. In
+ the action of the grand piano the keys are leaded in front
+ of the balance rail instead of back of it. This is due to
+ the fact that in the grand piano the hammer rests in a
+ horizontal position and its whole weight must be actually
+ lifted and the force of gravity overcome, <span
+ class='pagenum'><a name="Page_023" id="Page_023"></a>[Pg
+ 023]</span>while in the upright, the hammer rests in a
+ vertical position, only requiring to be thrown forward.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ <i>G P</i>, is the guide pin, generally of oval shape, with
+ the longest diameter in line with the key. The hole in the
+ lower portion of the key, in which the guide pin works, is
+ bushed with bushing cloth and is made to fit so closely
+ that the key will not move laterally, yet not so tightly
+ that the key will not work easily.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ <i>Bm</i>, is a wooden block called the bottom; sometimes
+ called the key-rocker. It is held in position by the two
+ screws shown in cut by which it can be adjusted or
+ regulated.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ <i>E</i>, is the extension communicating the motion of the
+ key to the upper part of the action. There are various ways
+ in which the extension is connected to the bottom. In this
+ action, the extension is made round at the lower end and
+ fits snugly into a hole in the bottom upon a felt disc.
+ When the action is taken out, the extensions simply lift
+ out of the holes, and when it is put back it is necessary
+ to enter each one in its place. In other actions, the upper
+ side of the <span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_024"
+ id="Page_024"></a>[Pg 024]</span>bottom where the extension
+ rests has no hole but simply a felt covering upon which the
+ extension rests; in this case it is necessary to provide
+ what is called an extension guide which is hinged to the
+ extension guide rail shown in the cut at the left of the
+ extension. In actions of this kind, the extensions remain
+ in place at all times and the trouble of placing them
+ properly on the bottom when replacing the action is
+ obviated. Other methods also are employed which are readily
+ understood upon slight examination, but are essentially
+ similar to the above. Instead of the bottom, a capstan
+ screw is used in some actions as follows:
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ <i>Cpn</i>, is a capstan screw used in some actions in
+ place of the bottom. It is turned by inserting a pointed
+ instrument in one of the four holes, thus raising or
+ lowering the capstan in regulating. The lower end of the
+ extension is felted. In such actions the extension is
+ invariably provided with the extension guide.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ <i>B</i>, is the metal action bracket. The bracket is one
+ solid piece of metal. There are generally four brackets in
+ the upright action. The brackets <span class='pagenum'><a
+ name="Page_025" id="Page_025"></a>[Pg 025]</span>rest on
+ supports in and at the sides of the keybed, and are secured
+ at the top by large bolts,
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ <i>BB</i>, which go through the metal plate and into the
+ wooden frame or pin block. At the top of each bracket is an
+ opening to receive this bolt and a thumbscrew (not shown in
+ the cut, being behind the hammer) which fastens the action
+ securely in position.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ <i>M R</i>, is the main rail; so called because the main
+ constituents of the action are attached to it. (Everything
+ designated as "rail" in the action runs the entire length
+ of the action in one solid piece.)
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ <i>W</i>, is the wippen. Those pieces upon which or by
+ which the small letter <i>g</i> is shown are the flanges.
+ The one at the left of the wippen is called the wippen
+ flange. It is made fast to the main rail by a screw, and
+ upon it the wippen is hinged by means of a "center-pin" at
+ the lower end. The center-pin in the wippen is driven
+ through a hole in which it fits tightly and immovably in
+ the middle part, and it (the center-pin) is consequently
+ stationary in the wippen. The flange extends down at the
+ <span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_026"
+ id="Page_026"></a>[Pg 026]</span>sides of the wippen and
+ the holes in flange are made large enough to receive
+ bushing cloth in which the center-pin works freely but not
+ loosely. All flange joints are of this nature; some,
+ however, are provided with a means for tightening the
+ center-pin in the middle portion of the joint.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ <i>j</i>, is the jack. The purpose of the jack is to
+ communicate the motion of the wippen to the hammer. The
+ precise adjustment of the jack and the adjacent parts upon
+ which it depends for its exact movements, play an important
+ part in regulating the "touch" of the piano, and will be
+ fully entered into in following lessons.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ <i>js</i>, jack spring. Its purpose is to hold the jack
+ inward against the "nose" or "heel" of the hammer butt.
+ (See <i>Bt</i>, hammer butt.)
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ <i>Rr</i>, regulating rail. The <i>regulating button</i> is
+ shown attached to the rail by the regulating screw which is
+ turned by means of its ring on top of <i>Rr</i>. The
+ purpose of the regulating button is to throw the point of
+ the jack out of the nose of the hammer butt, and allow the
+ hammer to rebound from the string. If the button is too
+ <span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_027"
+ id="Page_027"></a>[Pg 027]</span>high, it does not throw or
+ trip the jack in time to prevent blocking. When the button
+ is too low, it disengages too soon, and much of the force
+ of the key is lost before it reaches the hammer.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ <i>BR</i>, is the block rail, felted on the side next to
+ the jack which strikes against it when thrown from nose.
+ This rail is absent in some actions, in which case the back
+ of the jack is felted and strikes against the "back catch,"
+ which is also felted on inner side. (The back catch has no
+ mark in the cut, but is explained below in connection with
+ the "back check.")
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ <i>BC</i>, is the back check which is simply a piece of
+ wood with a thick piece of felt glued to the inner face and
+ suspended on a wire.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ <i>BCW</i>, back check wire supporting the back check, and
+ screwed to the wippen. The purpose of the back check is to
+ check the hammer by coming in contact with the "back catch"
+ (the backward projection of the butt), at a short distance
+ from the string in its return, and prevent the hammer from
+ falling entirely back to its rest position, thereby
+ preventing quick repetition.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ <span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_028"
+ id="Page_028"></a>[Pg 028]</span>
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ <i>Bl</i>, bridle. This is a piece of tape about an eighth
+ of an inch wide with a piece of leather glued to the end
+ and a hole near the end for the point of the "stirrup" or
+ bridle wire. The cut shows where the bridle is fastened in
+ the hammer butt by being put into the hole in the butt, and
+ the back catch stem covered with glue and driven in by it
+ which precludes all possibility of its coming loose. The
+ bridle passes through a hole in the lower part of the back
+ catch. Its purpose is to assist the hammer to return
+ quickly by hanging to it with the weight of the wippen,
+ extension, jack, etc., when the key is released. Thus the
+ bridle becomes the main factor in the matter of quick
+ repetition.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ <i>Bl W</i>, bridle wire, screwed into wippen, bent in the
+ shape of a buckle at top to hold bridle.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ <i>Bt</i>, butt; or, more specifically, hammer butt. In
+ some cheap actions the butt is joined to its flange
+ <i>g</i>, by the means described under the head of wippen
+ flange; but in this action the center-pin is held firmly in
+ the butt by a small strip of brass containing a set screw;
+ somewhat obscure in the cut, but discernible. As <span
+ class='pagenum'><a name="Page_029" id="Page_029"></a>[Pg
+ 029]</span>explained elsewhere, all center-pins turn in the
+ flange and not in the middle part.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ <i>HS</i>, hammer shank in rest position.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ <i>H</i>, hammer showing wood body or head, and covering of
+ two layers of felt.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ <i>H R</i>, hammer rail, resting on felt cushion, <i>c</i>,
+ glued to rail or bracket. The hammer rail is held in
+ position by the rod, shown under the hammer shank, which is
+ hinged to the bracket at the lower end, and which allows it
+ to be moved forward when the soft pedal is used. The soft
+ pedal communicates with this rail by a rod which moves it
+ forward and thereby shortens the stroke of the hammers and
+ produces a softer tone.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ <i>sr</i>, spring rail screwed to the brackets. This rail
+ supports the light wire springs which assist the hammers in
+ returning to rest position.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ <i>S</i>, string.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ <i>D</i>, is the damper head secured to the damper wire by
+ a set screw.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ <i>DL</i>, damper lever, working in damper flange <i>g</i>,
+ which is screwed to main rail.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ <i>s</i>, spoon; so called from its shape. It is screwed
+ into <span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_030"
+ id="Page_030"></a>[Pg 030]</span>the wippen. When the key
+ is struck, the motion on the wippen throws the spoon
+ forward, pushing the lower end of damper lever forward, and
+ releasing the damper from its contact with the string. The
+ damper is held against the string by the wire spring which
+ is seen running from the damper flange to the top of the
+ damper lever.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ <i>DR</i>, damper rod. This is a rod running from the left
+ or bass end of the action to the right as far as the
+ dampers are continued in the treble. It is acted upon by
+ the "loud" or damper pedal, which raises the outer
+ projection, and by being hinged to the main rail about the
+ same height as this projection, the entire rod is thrown
+ outward against the lower ends of the damper levers,
+ releasing all the dampers simultaneously. This being the
+ only office of the right pedal, it is readily seen that
+ this pedal does not increase the loudness, but simply
+ <i>sustains</i> any number of tones struck successively,
+ giving the effect of more volume.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ The student should familiarize himself with all technical
+ terms used in this lesson, as they will be <span
+ class='pagenum'><a name="Page_031" id="Page_031"></a>[Pg
+ 031]</span>referred to frequently in the succeeding lessons
+ on repairing and regulating.
+ </p>
+ <div class="center">
+ QUESTIONS ON LESSON III.
+ </div>
+ <p>
+ Without reference to anything but the cut, give technical
+ names for parts of action represented by the following
+ letters or abbreviations:
+ </p>
+ <ol>
+ <li>
+ Bnc R, c, G P, BP, Ky, L.
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ Bm, Cpn, E, W, j, js, g, and M R.
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ Rr, B C, B R, B C W, Bl, and Bl W.
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ Bt, H, H S, H R, and sr.
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ S, D, D L, D R, s, B, and B B.
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ Explain the purpose and movements of the jack.
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ Describe a flange and the joint of same.
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ Give names of the four flanges shown in cut.
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ What is the purpose of the back catch and back check?
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ Explain the mechanical action of the damper pedal, and
+ its effect when used; also, that of the soft pedal.
+ </li>
+ </ol>
+ <hr style="width: 65%;" />
+ <p>
+ <span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_032"
+ id="Page_032"></a>[Pg 032]</span>
+ </p>
+ <h2>
+ <a name="LESSON_IV" id="LESSON_IV"></a>LESSON IV.
+ </h2>
+ <hr style="width: 25%;" />
+ <h3>
+ ACTION OF SQUARE AND GRAND PIANOS.
+ </h3>
+ <p class="center smcap">
+ Action of the Square Piano.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ Up to about the year 1870, the square was the popular
+ piano. The grand has always been too expensive for the
+ great music-loving masses, and previous to this time the
+ upright had not been developed sufficiently to assert
+ itself as a satisfactory instrument. The numerous
+ objections to the square piano forced its manufacture to be
+ discontinued a few years after the introduction of the
+ improved new upright. Square pianos that come, at the
+ present day, under the hand of the tuner, are usually at
+ least fifteen years old, and more frequently twenty or
+ more. However, in some localities the tuner will meet
+ numbers of these pianos and he will find them a great
+ source of revenue, as they are almost invariably in need of
+ repair.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ Compare the three cuts of actions in the study of this
+ lesson.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ The main constituent parts of the square action are similar
+ in appearance to those of the upright; in <span
+ class='pagenum'><a name="Page_033" id="Page_033"></a>[Pg
+ 033]</span>fact, most of the parts are the same in name and
+ office. However, the parts are necessarily assembled very
+ differently. In the square action, the hammers strike in a
+ vertical direction, while in the upright they strike in a
+ horizontal direction; the motion of the key being the same
+ in both.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ Of the three types, the square is the simplest action, as
+ many of the parts seen in the upright and grand are
+ entirely absent in the square.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ Beginning with the key, it has its balance pin, guide pin,
+ cushions, etc., practically the same as in the other types.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ The bottom, or key rocker, is reversed in the square; the
+ end transmitting the motion being nearest the performer.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ The extension and wippen are absent in the square, as the
+ jack is attached directly to the bottom or key-rocker.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ The back check is screwed to the key, and as the hammer
+ head rests against it after striking, the use of the
+ contrivance called the back catch in the upright is
+ unnecessary.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ <span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_034"
+ id="Page_034"></a>[Pg 034]</span>
+ </p>
+ <div class="center">
+ <a href="images/original035.jpg"><img
+ src="images/image035.png"
+ alt="Action of the Square Piano."
+ title="Action of the Square Piano." /></a> <p
+ class="caption">Action of the Square Piano.</p>
+ </div>
+ <div class="bb bt sf">
+ <p class="center smcap">
+ Action of the Square Piano.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ A. Action Frame.<br />
+ B's Indicate the Cushions, or Bushing, of felt, cloth or
+ leather.<br />
+ C. Balance Rail.<br />
+ D. Balance Pin. Round.<br />
+ E. Mortised Cap for Balance Pin. Bushed.<br />
+ F. Key.<br />
+ G. Lead.<br />
+ H. Back Check.<br />
+ I. Bottom or Key Rocker.<br />
+ J. Bottom Screws; used to regulate height of Jack.<br />
+ K. Jack.<br />
+ L. Jack Spring; concealed under Bottom.<br />
+ M. Center Pin to Jack.<br />
+ N. Hammer Rail.<br />
+ O. Regulating Screw.<br />
+ P. Regulating Button.<br />
+ Q. Flange Rail.<br />
+ R. Flange. Split.<br />
+ S. Flange Rail Screw.<br />
+ T. Flange Screw, to regulate jaws of flange.<br />
+ U. Hammer Butt.<br />
+ V. Center Pin.<br />
+ W. Hammer Stem or Shank.<br />
+ X. Hammer Head.<br />
+ Y. Hammer Felt. Treble hammers sometimes capped with
+ buckskin in old instruments.<br />
+ </p>
+ <p class="center smcap">
+ Top Action of Square Piano.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ 1. Damper Lifter Wire.<br />
+ 2. Damper Lifter Buttons.<br />
+ 3. Damper Felt.<br />
+ 4. Damper Head.<br />
+ 5. Damper Lever.<br />
+ 6. Damper Leads.<br />
+ 7. Shade, supported by wire stanchions, on top of which
+ are screwed shade buttons.<br />
+ 8. Damper Rail. Tilted by Loud Pedal Rod which raises
+ all the dampers simultaneously.<br />
+ 9. Damper Flange.<br />
+ 10. Flange Screw.<br />
+ 11. Damper Lever Center Pin.<br />
+ </p>
+ <p class="center smcap">
+ The Trap Action
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ consists of Pedals, Pedal Braces, Pedal Feet, Pedal Rods,
+ Roller Boards or Elbows, Studs, Plugs, Trap Springs,
+ Wires and Lifter Rods.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ The cut is from the French action. Nearly all square
+ pianos in use at the present time are of this type.
+ </p>
+ </div>
+ <p>
+ <span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_035"
+ id="Page_035"></a>[Pg 035]</span><span class='pagenum'><a
+ name="Page_036" id="Page_036"></a>[Pg 036]</span>The hammer
+ rail in the square, in addition to serving its purpose as a
+ rest for the hammers, also serves the purpose of the
+ regulating rail, as you will see the regulating screw, with
+ its button, attached to it. This rail is stationary in the
+ square, not moving toward the strings and shortening the
+ stroke as it does in the upright when the soft pedal is
+ used. The soft pedal in the square piano simply interposes
+ a piece of felt between each hammer and its corresponding
+ string or strings. This felt being much softer than that of
+ the hammers, the tone is greatly subdued.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ The mechanical arrangement of the dampers is very different
+ in the square from that in the upright. The dampers are
+ above the strings. Instead of springs to hold them against
+ the strings, they simply rest upon them with their weight.
+ In many old squares some of the dampers fall upon nodal
+ points, causing defective damping or harmonic after-tones.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ The stationary parts of the square action are: action
+ frame, to which is secured the balance rail, balance pins
+ and guide pins, hammer rail, flange rail, and damper rail.
+ When the key is struck, the parts that move upward are: the
+ back end of the key, bottom, jack, hammer, back check,
+ damper wire and damper lever. The hammer falls back upon
+ the back check immediately after striking, and remains
+ <span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_037"
+ id="Page_037"></a>[Pg 037]</span>there until the key is
+ released, when all movable parts fall to rest position.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ The action of the jack is the same in all types.
+ </p>
+ <p class="center smcap">
+ Action of the Grand Piano.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ After thoroughly going over the details of the action of
+ the square and upright pianos, there remains very little to
+ describe in the action of the grand.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ The grand action partakes of the characteristics of both
+ the upright and the square, and is somewhat more
+ complicated than either.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ The bottom and extension are almost identical with those of
+ the upright; the extension, however, is necessarily very
+ short.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ The wippen is of different construction, and somewhat more
+ complicated in the grand.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ The flange rail in the grand is made also to serve the
+ purpose of regulating rail, as the hammer rail is made to
+ do in the square.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ The back check is identical with that of the square.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ The dampers are the same in their working principles as
+ those of the square, but are generally different in
+ construction; yet, some squares have the same arrangement
+ of dampers as those shown in the cut of the grand action.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ <span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_038"
+ id="Page_038"></a>[Pg 038]</span>
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ The soft pedal of the grand shifts the entire action to the
+ right so that the hammers strike only two and in some cases
+ only one of the strings.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ The student should study the three types of actions from
+ the actions themselves, if possible.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ <span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_039"
+ id="Page_039"></a>[Pg 039]</span>
+ </p>
+ <div class="center">
+ <a href="images/original039.jpg"><img
+ src="images/image039.png"
+ alt="Action of the Grand Piano."
+ title="Action of the Grand Piano." /></a>
+ <p class="caption">Action of the Grand Piano.</p>
+ </div>
+ <div class="bb bt sf">
+ <p class="center smcap">
+ Action of the Grand Piano.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ 1. Indicates the felt, cloth or leather, upon which the
+ various parts of the action rest, or fall
+ noiselessly.<br />
+ 2. Key.<br />
+ 3. Bottom; sometimes called Key Rocker.<br />
+ 4. Extension; split at lower end to receive center pin
+ in Bottom.<br />
+ 5. Wippen Support.<br />
+ 6. Jack.<br />
+ 7. Jack Spring.<br />
+ 8. Flange and Regulating Rail.<br />
+ 9. Regulating Screw, Button and Cushion.<br />
+ 10. Escapement Lever.<br />
+ 11. Regulating Screw in Hammer Flange, for Escapement
+ Lever.<br />
+ 12. Check Wire, for Escapement Lever.<br />
+ 13. Screw to regulate fall of Escapement Lever.<br />
+ 14. Lever Flange, screwed to Flange Rail.<br />
+ 15. Hammer Shank.<br />
+ 16. Hammer.<br />
+ 17. Back Check.<br />
+ 18. Damper Lever, leaded.<br />
+ 19. Damper Wire, screwed into upright.<br />
+ 20. Damper Wire Guide, fastened to Sound-Board.<br />
+ 21. Damper Head and Felt.<br />
+ 0. Center Pins. Holes lined with Bushing Cloth.<br />
+ </p>
+ </div>
+ <p>
+ <span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_040"
+ id="Page_040"></a>[Pg 040]</span>
+ </p>
+ <p class="center smcap">
+ Instructions for Removing the Square and Grand Actions.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ First, feel or look underneath the keyboard and see if
+ there are screws that go up into the action. In most of the
+ better grade instruments the action is fastened in this
+ way. If the screws have square heads, your tuning hammer
+ will fit them and bring them out; if common screws, a
+ screw-driver will suffice. Look through the opening in the
+ sound board where the hammers strike and see that they are
+ all down before pulling out the action, lest they break off
+ by catching on the under side of the sound board. This is
+ almost sure to happen if actions are out of order.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ In most square pianos, the narrow board just below the keys
+ can be removed by being raised straight up, as it simply
+ sets over screw heads in the key frame. When this strip is
+ removed, a wire handle will be found in the middle of the
+ key frame by which to draw out the action. In some cases,
+ and especially in grands, this strip is secured by screws
+ found underneath the piano. In other pianos, the action is
+ held by screws in front of the key frame, which will be
+ revealed by the removal of the front strip, above referred
+ to.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ Be especially careful in placing the action back into the
+ piano. As a rule, it is safe to keep the right (long) end
+ of the square action bearing against the right side of
+ entrance, being sure that one end of action does not get
+ ahead, which might cause some <span class='pagenum'><a
+ name="Page_041" id="Page_041"></a>[Pg 041]</span>of the
+ hammers to strike the props for which the openings are left
+ in the back extremities of action.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ While the action is out, study carefully the purpose of
+ every part and its movements, referring to this and the
+ previous lesson until you have thoroughly mastered the
+ entire mechanism. Do not rest until you can name correctly
+ everything you see and know its use so well that you could
+ explain it satisfactorily to an inquirer. Sometimes the
+ tuner is asked a great many perplexing questions and is
+ expected to respond intelligently.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ We have dealt with the three types of actions that are most
+ commonly found in the three types of pianos. The student
+ must bear in mind that there are numerous manufacturers of
+ actions, and that each has his peculiar method of
+ constructing his special action to bring about the desired
+ results, which are practically the same in all cases; and
+ consequently, while a variety of construction will confront
+ the beginner in piano regulating and repairing, he will
+ understand the construction and requirements of any action
+ that may demand his skill from the foregoing instruction,
+ if properly mastered. In this, as in all other mechanical
+ professions, one's inventive genius must often be <span
+ class='pagenum'><a name="Page_042" id="Page_042"></a>[Pg
+ 042]</span>summoned to assist in surmounting obstacles
+ which are sure to arise unexpectedly.
+ </p>
+ <p class="center">
+ QUESTIONS ON LESSON IV.
+ </p>
+ <ol>
+ <li>
+ From a philosophical point of view, which do you consider
+ the easiest and most perfect of the three types of
+ actions? Also give reasons.
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ Considering the wippen and its attachments as one part,
+ how many parts move when a key is struck in the upright
+ piano? How many in the square?
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ Name the parts found in the upright action that are
+ absent in the square.
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ Describe the three methods by which soft tone is obtained
+ from use of soft pedal in the three types of actions.
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ What rail serves two purposes in the square action, and
+ what are they? What rail serves two purposes in the grand
+ action, and what are they?
+ </li>
+ </ol>
+ <hr style="width: 65%;" />
+ <p>
+ <span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_043"
+ id="Page_043"></a>[Pg 043]</span>
+ </p>
+ <h2>
+ <a name="LESSON_V" id="LESSON_V"></a>LESSON V.
+ </h2>
+ <hr style="width: 25%;" />
+ <h3>
+ REGULATING AND REPAIRING.
+ </h3>
+ <p class="center smcap">
+ Faults in Pianos, aside from the Action, and their
+ Remedies.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ One of the most common, and, at the same time, most
+ annoying conditions both to the owner of the piano and the
+ tuner, is the "sympathetic rattle." This trouble is most
+ usual in the square and the grand pianos and is generally
+ due to some loose substance lying on the sound board. The
+ rattle will be apparent only when certain keys are struck,
+ other tones being perfectly free from it. These tones cause
+ the sound board to vibrate in sympathy, so to speak, with
+ the weight of the intruding substance at the point where it
+ lies, and if it be moved the distance of six inches it will
+ sometimes cease to respond to these particular tones, but
+ may respond to others, or cease to cause any trouble.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ The article may generally be found near the front of the
+ sound board under the top piece of the <span
+ class='pagenum'><a name="Page_044" id="Page_044"></a>[Pg
+ 044]</span>case, this being the place where it would most
+ likely fall. No special instrument is made for the purpose
+ of searching for such objects, but one can be easily
+ devised with which the tuner can feel all over the sound
+ board, and remove such articles as well as dust and dirt.
+ Secure a piece of rattan or good pliable hickory, and draw
+ it down to the width of half an inch, thin enough to bend
+ easily, and long enough to reach anywhere under the
+ stringing or metal plate. By putting a cloth over this
+ stick you can remove anything that comes in its way. Some
+ difficulty will be found, however, in getting under the
+ plate in some pianos. In case you cannot procure a suitable
+ piece of wood, a piece of clock spring will be found to
+ answer very well. We have taken from pianos such articles
+ as pencils, pieces of candy, dolls, pointers used by music
+ teachers, tacks, nails, pennies, buttons, pieces of broken
+ lamp chimneys, etc., etc., any one of which is sufficient
+ to render the piano unfit for use. The sound board of the
+ upright being vertical prevents its being subject to the
+ above difficulty.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ A split in the sound board, in any style of piano,
+ sometimes causes trouble due to the vibrating edges <span
+ class='pagenum'><a name="Page_045" id="Page_045"></a>[Pg
+ 045]</span>of the board coming in contact with each other.
+ Insert the point of your screwdriver in the crack, holding
+ it there firmly; if the rattling stops, the difficulty is
+ discovered, and may be remedied by placing a screw or wedge
+ in the crack, or a wedge of wood, cork or rubber between
+ the sound board and iron plate or casing, if the location
+ of the trouble permits. While this method seems a
+ perfunctory one, it is nevertheless the best the tuner is
+ prepared to do, for it is next to impossible to glue a
+ crack in the sound board successfully outside of a regular
+ factory or repair shop, where the instrument may be taken
+ all apart and a new sound board put in or the old one
+ properly repaired.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ Sometimes the sound board gets loose or unglued at the
+ edges, or the bridges or ribs come loose. Any part of the
+ piano where there is vibration or loose material may become
+ the source of the sympathetic rattle, as even parts of the
+ case vibrate with the tones struck; so you must examine the
+ panels, lock, hinges, soft pedal bar (in square), in fact
+ all parts of the case and woodwork for the location of the
+ trouble. Once found, the remedy will suggest itself. The
+ greatest difficulty is to locate the cause. Very <span
+ class='pagenum'><a name="Page_046" id="Page_046"></a>[Pg
+ 046]</span>frequently this will be found entirely outside
+ of the piano; a loose window glass, picture glass, lamp or
+ other article of furniture in the room may respond to a
+ particular tone or its octave. We have never found the
+ sympathetic rattle in the action; it has rattles, but not
+ of this character. Any other defect which may be found
+ under this head will only require the exercise of a little
+ mechanical ingenuity to suggest a remedy.
+ </p>
+ <p class="center">
+ <span class="smcap">Regulating and Repairing the Upright
+ Action.</span><br />
+ <span class="sf">(Use cut of upright action for reference
+ in following study.)</span>
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ We will begin with the key and take up each part of the
+ action in the succession in which motion is transmitted.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ 1. <i>Key</i>. Keys stick; that is, after being struck,
+ they fail to come up quickly, if at all. First ascertain if
+ the trouble is really in the key, or in the upper part of
+ the action. To do this, lift the extension or wippen until
+ the upper part of the action is entirely free from the key,
+ so that you may test the key independently. Some keys are
+ leaded so that they will fall in front of the balance rail,
+ others so that they will fall back of it; in either case,
+ lift the low end and let go, to see if it will fall by its
+ own weight. If <span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_047"
+ id="Page_047"></a>[Pg 047]</span>it seems quite free, you
+ may know the trouble is not in the key; you will also find
+ that when you release the extension or wippen, it will not
+ fall readily, showing that the trouble lies in the upper
+ part.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ If the trouble is found in the key, examine the guide pin.
+ See if it is placed in a direct line with the key. If so,
+ and it still binds, enlarge the hole by pressing the wood
+ back slightly with some wedge-shaped instrument, if you
+ have not a pair of the key pliers which are used for this
+ purpose. See that the cloth, with which the hole is bushed,
+ is not loose and wrinkled. Do not oil or grease the guide
+ pin unless such treatment has been previously resorted to,
+ as the polished pin will work more freely in the dry cloth.
+ Do not pinch hard on the pin with rough pliers and spoil
+ the polished surface.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ Sometimes you will find one key warped so that it rubs on
+ the next, in which case, plane off a slight shaving to free
+ it. Sometimes changing the position of the guide pin will
+ straighten or level the key and make it work all right.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ The balance pin is subject to some of the same difficulties
+ as the guide pin. See that it sets properly and is not
+ bound by the mortise.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ <span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_048"
+ id="Page_048"></a>[Pg 048]</span>
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ Sometimes a splinter will be found on one side of a key
+ where the lead has been put in. A piece of any foreign
+ material between two keys generally causes both to stick.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ Where the action is too deep, that is, the keys go down
+ farther than they ought, place cardboard washers under the
+ felt ones around the guide pin, or raise the felt strip
+ under back end of keys.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ Where the action is too shallow, place thin washers under
+ those around the balance pin. When this is done, the whole
+ action must be regulated accordingly, as this alteration
+ will make a change in the working of the upper part of the
+ action.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ 2. <i>The Bottom or Capstan</i>. This should be so adjusted
+ that when the key falls back to its rest position, the
+ point of the jack will just spring into its place in the
+ nose of the hammer butt. If held too high, the jack fails
+ to catch in the nose, and the key may be struck without
+ producing any effect on the hammer. When the bottom or
+ capstan is too low, the point of the jack will be some
+ distance below the notch, which will cause what is known as
+ lost motion, it being necessary to depress the key a
+ portion of its depth before the jack can act upon the <span
+ class='pagenum'><a name="Page_049" id="Page_049"></a>[Pg
+ 049]</span>hammer. Depress the key slowly, watching the
+ hammer, and the fault will be discovered.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ After a piano has been used for some time, the keys that
+ are struck most frequently (those in the middle of the
+ instrument) will be found to have this fault. The felts
+ under the keys and those which are between the working
+ parts of the action become compressed or worn so that the
+ jack will be found to set so low that there will be lost
+ motion in the key. In this case, loosen one of the screws
+ in the bottom and turn the other down so as to move the
+ jack upward until nearly all lost motion is taken up. A
+ little play is generally necessary, but very little. In
+ case the action has a capstan, simply turn it upward.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ 3. <i>Back Check</i>. Blocking is most usually caused by
+ the back check being too near the back catch, so that when
+ the key is struck, the back check holds the hammer against
+ the string. This should be seen after raising the bottom or
+ capstan as above referred to. It will be observed that when
+ this is done on account of the wear of the felts, the back
+ check will stand much nearer the back catch than it did
+ before, and will need bending back so as to give the hammer
+ plenty of "rebound." A steel instrument with <span
+ class='pagenum'><a name="Page_050" id="Page_050"></a>[Pg
+ 050]</span>properly shaped notches at the point, called a
+ regulator, is used for bending wires in regulating the
+ action. See that the wires stand as nearly in line as is
+ possible. In old actions that are considerably worn,
+ however, you will be obliged to alter some more than
+ others.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ 4. <i>Bridle and Bridle Wire</i>. In putting in a new
+ bridle, it should be doubled over at the end and secured to
+ the hammer butt by a small tack. Be sure you get it exactly
+ the same length as the others; otherwise it will be
+ necessary to bend the bridle wire out of line. Some tuners
+ glue the bridle around the back catch stem, but the above
+ method is preferable.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ The purpose of the bridle is to jerk the hammer back
+ quickly and the wire must be set, neither so far back as to
+ check the stroke of the hammer, nor so far forward that the
+ bridle is too slack to draw upon the hammer.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ 5. <i>Jack</i>. The jack itself seldom gets out of order.
+ So long as its flange does not come unglued in the wippen,
+ or its spring get out of place or broken, or get tight in
+ its joint, it will need nothing. Its adjustment and action
+ is controlled by the bottom or capstan, and the regulating
+ button.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ <span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_051"
+ id="Page_051"></a>[Pg 051]</span>
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ 6. <i>Regulating Button</i>. This button determines the
+ point in the stroke of the hammer where the jack flies off
+ from the nose of the butt. If the button is too high, the
+ jack does not fly off soon enough, and the result is, that
+ the hammer either blocks against the string or bounces from
+ the jack after the stroke has been made, striking the
+ string a second or third time from one stroke of the key.
+ The felt punching on the lower side of the button often
+ wears until this trouble prevails. Lower the button by
+ turning down the screw on top of the regulator rail; if
+ lowered too far, however, the action is weakened by causing
+ the jack to fly off too soon, without giving the hammer a
+ sufficient impulse. A regulating screwdriver is used for
+ this, but in its absence, a wire hook, similar to a shoe
+ buttoner, will turn the screw.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ The block rail is properly adjusted at the factory and
+ requires no attention.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ 7. <i>Hammer Butt</i>. The felts and leather on the heel of
+ the hammer butt wear out and must be replaced. The felt
+ cushion, that is lowest and farthest to the left (see
+ illustration), is the one that wears out first. The jack,
+ in returning to the notch, strikes <span class='pagenum'><a
+ name="Page_052" id="Page_052"></a>[Pg 052]</span>this
+ cushion, and in time wears it away so that the jack in
+ returning strikes the wood of the hammer butt, producing a
+ sharp click, which is very annoying, to say the least. This
+ click is heard at the instant the key rises to its rest
+ position. Sometimes, however, a similar click is produced
+ by the top of the key striking the board which is set over
+ the keys, due to the cloth being eaten off by moths, or a
+ pencil or some other article lying on the keys back of this
+ board.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ The center pin in the butt of some cheap actions is not
+ held in the butt by metal clip and screw, and if it gets
+ loose so that it works out, must be replaced by a larger
+ pin. The size of center pins generally used in the factory,
+ is .050 of an inch in diameter; the size for repairing
+ should be .053. All of the best actions have the set screw
+ with which to make the pin fast in the butt.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ Hammers stick when the center pin is too tight in the
+ flange. The bushing in the flange often expands. Some
+ tuners oil at the ends of the pin with kerosene or wet it
+ with alcohol, which is very good; but a better plan is to
+ shrink the bushing with a drop of water on each side so
+ that it will penetrate the bushing. After this is done, the
+ piano cannot be <span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_053"
+ id="Page_053"></a>[Pg 053]</span>used for a day or two, as
+ the water first swells the bushing, making all the hammers
+ stick; but when they are dry again, they will be found
+ free. This may seem a curious method, but you need not be
+ afraid of it; it is the most effective.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ Before leaving the hammer butt, see that the hammer spring
+ is in its place.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ 8. <i>Hammer Stem</i>. These sometimes warp, split, crack,
+ or come unglued at the butt or hammer. If twisted so far
+ that it does not strike properly on the strings, or that it
+ binds against the next hammer, the best thing is to put in
+ a new stem. If merely split or unglued, it may be repaired.
+ Sometimes a click is heard and it will seem impossible to
+ find the cause, the hammer and stem apparently perfect, but
+ a close examination will reveal a looseness in the stem
+ somewhere.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ In putting in a new shank, drill or chip out the old one,
+ scrape the holes out clean, take your measure carefully,
+ and do not make the new shank too tight, but large enough
+ to fill the hole snugly. Apply glue to the ends of the
+ shank and also in the holes. Cedar is used in some makes,
+ but good maple is stronger, and is more generally used.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ <span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_054"
+ id="Page_054"></a>[Pg 054]</span>
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ 9. <i>Hammers</i>. When too hard, soften with a felt pick.
+ Do not raise the felt up, but stick the pick in the felt
+ just back of the point and this will loosen it up and make
+ it softer and more elastic. Where the strings have worn
+ deep grooves, sandpaper them down nearly even and soften
+ the felt as above.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ In regluing the felt to the head, glue only the back ends
+ of the felt, and clamp with strong rubber band till the
+ glue sets. Use tailor's chalk (fuller's earth) to clean
+ hammer felts. To harden or draw felts back in shape, place
+ a damp cloth over them, and then pass a hot iron over it.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ 10. <i>Dampers</i>. Damper felt often gets hardened so that
+ when it comes against the vibrating string, it causes a
+ sort of buzzing sound. Loosen it up with the pick.
+ Imperfect damping can sometimes be corrected in the same
+ way.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ The damper head sometimes turns round on its wire, leaving
+ one or two strings undamped. Tighten the set screw. See
+ that the dampers are in line; and that they will stop the
+ tone properly when the key is released.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ Damper springs sometimes break. It is necessary to take out
+ the damper lever to put in a new one.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ <span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_055"
+ id="Page_055"></a>[Pg 055]</span>
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ See that the spoons are in line and work properly. Press
+ the sustaining pedal down, and see if all the dampers are
+ in line; if not, bend the damper wires with the regulator
+ until they line up perfectly.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ 11. <i>Damper Rod</i>. When the sustaining pedal squeaks,
+ look first to the pedal, then to the wooden rods leading up
+ to the damper rod. If the trouble is found in any of these,
+ or the springs, use sperm oil or vaseline.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ Catch hold of the damper rod at the left behind the action
+ and work it. If it squeaks, you will have to take out the
+ action and oil the swings where they are hinged to the main
+ rail.
+ </p>
+ <p class="center">
+ QUESTIONS ON LESSON V.
+ </p>
+ <ol>
+ <li>
+ If you should find a key sticking, how would you
+ determine the cause?
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ Name all the defects to which the key is subject.
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ Describe the proper adjustment of bottom or capstan.
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ Give two causes of blocking.
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ Give the purpose of the regulating button, and its proper
+ adjustment.
+ </li>
+ </ol>
+ <hr style="width: 65%;" />
+ <p>
+ <span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_056"
+ id="Page_056"></a>[Pg 056]</span>
+ </p>
+ <h2>
+ <a name="LESSON_VI" id="LESSON_VI"></a>LESSON VI.
+ </h2>
+ <hr style="width: 25%;" />
+ <h3>
+ REGULATING AND REPAIRING.(Continued.)
+ </h3>
+ <p class="center smcap">
+ The Square Action.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ 1. <i>The key</i> in the square piano is subject to the
+ same troubles as that of the upright, and requires the same
+ treatment. However, the keys being much longer are more
+ liable to cause trouble by warping.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ 2. <i>Bottom or Key Rocker</i>. Unlike in the upright
+ action, the jack is attached directly to the bottom; but,
+ lowering or raising the bottom has the same effect in both
+ cases. The screws regulating the height of the jack can be
+ gotten at with a proper screwdriver. If you have to take
+ out the key in order to regulate the bottom, first take
+ particular notice of the conditions in respect to the
+ operation of the jack on the hammer. Work the key slowly,
+ to discover if there is lost motion. Decide which way the
+ bottom must go and how far, so that you will not have to
+ remove and replace the key more than once <span
+ class='pagenum'><a name="Page_057" id="Page_057"></a>[Pg
+ 057]</span>or twice to adjust it. In taking out the key,
+ remove the board which is set edgewise over the keys
+ immediately back of where the fingers strike, by taking out
+ the screw at each end. Lift the hammer with the finger
+ until the jack falls out of place; then by lifting the key
+ off the balance pin it can be drawn out. The back check
+ will sometimes rub so hard against the regulating button
+ that it will be bent somewhat, and must be adjusted after
+ the key is replaced.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ The bottom is often found to have shrunken; it rattles at
+ every stroke of the key. This can generally be stopped by
+ simply turning the back screw down until tight, which can
+ be done without taking the key out. This will rarely be
+ found to alter the jack enough to cause it to fail to
+ return to the notch in the butt. After doing this, however,
+ it is well to examine for such a condition.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ A sluggish motion of the jack is often found in old square
+ pianos caused by the swelling of the wood, at the point
+ where the jack is hinged to the bottom, or by the center
+ pin's becoming foul from oxide. This will cause the jack to
+ fail at times to operate on the hammer, especially in quick
+ repetition. The <span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_058"
+ id="Page_058"></a>[Pg 058]</span>key is struck with no
+ response. Take out the bottom entirely, and with the
+ fingers press the sides of the bottom inward; at the same
+ time, work the jack back and forth. This will generally
+ free it if the jack-spring is all right.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ 3. <i>Jack</i>. As in the upright, the behavior of the jack
+ depends entirely upon the surrounding members. A very
+ common occurrence in the square piano is a broken
+ jack-spring. This spring is concealed in a groove on the
+ under side of the bottom, with a linen thread leading
+ around the end of the jack and held fast by a wooden plug.
+ If the spring is found to be long enough, drive out the
+ plug, attach a new thread to the spring, and fasten as
+ before. If a new spring is needed, one may be made by
+ wrapping some small wire round a piece of music wire of the
+ right size.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ 4. <i>The back check, hammer stem and regulating button</i>
+ are subject to the same faults as their counterparts in the
+ upright, which may be remedied in the same way. Bridles and
+ hammer springs are not needed in the square, as the weight
+ of the hammer, moving in a vertical direction, is
+ sufficient to bring it to its rest position.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ <span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_059"
+ id="Page_059"></a>[Pg 059]</span>
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ 5. <i>Hammers</i>, when made of felt, will of course
+ require the same treatment as those in the upright. In many
+ old squares the hammers are built up of buckskin. If this
+ becomes beaten down hard, it is well to cap the hammer with
+ a new soft piece of buckskin, gluing only at the back ends.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ 6. <i>Butts and Flanges</i>. A click just as the key comes
+ up, indicates that the felt cushion, against which the jack
+ rests, is worn out and must be replaced.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ In all square actions the center pin, in the butt, is held
+ by friction alone, but rarely gets loose; if it should be
+ found loose, put in a larger pin.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ The flange, shown in the cut, is what is called a split
+ flange. By the set screw <b>T</b>, the jaws can be
+ regulated so that they neither clamp the center pin so
+ tightly as to make the action sluggish nor so loosely as to
+ let the hammer wabble.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ If the bushing cloth is found to be badly worn, it is
+ better to put in new, which must be done neatly, or the
+ result will not be satisfactory.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ Hammer flanges, like all other wooden parts, shrink away
+ from the screw heads and allow the hammer to drift to one
+ side or rattle. While the <span class='pagenum'><a
+ name="Page_060" id="Page_060"></a>[Pg 060]</span>action is
+ in the piano, strike the keys to see if there are any that
+ strike improperly. Mark the keys so as to indicate just
+ what the trouble is, so that you will know how to remedy it
+ when the action is out. If the hammers are set so close
+ that they rub against each other, you may have to cut off a
+ slight shaving of felt, but this is rarely necessary; for
+ if properly placed, there is generally room for all; yet
+ sometimes the expansion of the felt or warping of the shank
+ makes cutting necessary.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ 7. <i>Dampers</i>. The dampers in the square action depend
+ entirely upon their weight for their efficiency in damping
+ the strings and returning after being raised by the key.
+ Often, after the key is struck, the damper will not return
+ to its place and the string is undamped. This is generally
+ found to be caused by the wire sticking in the hole through
+ which it passes, the wire being rusty or bent or some
+ foreign substance being in the hole round the wire. The
+ bushing cloth in the hole may be in such condition as to
+ retard the free passage of the damper wire, in which case
+ the wire may be heated with a match and run up and down a
+ few times through the hole, which will free it. The damper
+ may not <span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_061"
+ id="Page_061"></a>[Pg 061]</span>fall readily on account of
+ a sluggish joint in the flange. Work it back and forth as
+ far as it will go a few times; if necessary, take it off
+ the damper rail and look for the cause of the trouble.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ Damper flanges get loose on the damper rail and work to one
+ side, causing defective damping and rattling. See that they
+ are all tight, and in their places.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ Damper lifter buttons sometimes hold the damper off the
+ string. See that the top button falls so low that the
+ damper lever does not touch it when the key is released.
+ This is accomplished by altering the lower button. Examine
+ the damper felts to see if they are moth-eaten, or have
+ become hardened or in any way impaired. Notice the
+ adjustment of the shade; that it is not too low or too
+ high. The purpose of the shade is to prevent the damper
+ levers from flying up; but it should be high enough so that
+ the levers do not touch it when the key is depressed
+ gently.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ Defective damping is one of the most annoying conditions,
+ and when one is employed to regulate a piano thoroughly and
+ put it in order, he should see that no key is left in which
+ this occurs. Strike each <span class='pagenum'><a
+ name="Page_062" id="Page_062"></a>[Pg 062]</span>key and
+ immediately let it up to see if it stops the sound quickly,
+ or, in other words, damps perfectly; if it does not, find
+ the cause and regulate until satisfactory.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ 8. <i>The grand action</i> being, in principle, practically
+ the same as that of the square and the upright, containing
+ the same mechanism as is found in those actions, it is
+ needless to give special instructions concerning it; as the
+ previous work has given the pupil a thorough knowledge of
+ the requirements of all actions, their common faults, and
+ proper methods of regulating to bring about satisfactory
+ results. Let us merely remark: Study thoroughly the
+ behavior of every component part of each action that comes
+ under your observation; understand what each part is for,
+ why it is there, and how it works or should work properly
+ to fill its office. Then regulate and try for results. If
+ you have natural mechanical genius, a little experience
+ will prepare you to do all regulating and repairing with
+ skill and quickness.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ <span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_063"
+ id="Page_063"></a>[Pg 063]</span>
+ </p>
+ <p class="center smcap">
+ Miscellaneous repairs.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ A few miscellaneous difficulties, common to all styles of
+ actions, are occasionally met with and need to be
+ rectified.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ 1. <i>Broken Hammer Shank</i>. Glue the ends, lay a nicely
+ fitting piece of wood, well coated with glue, on each side
+ and wrap with binding wire. If it is broken off up so close
+ to the hammer as not to permit this, drill a hole through
+ the hammer head in line with the center of the shank, with
+ a small-sized screwdriver such as watchmakers use, and run
+ the wire through this and around the shank, drawing it
+ firm; glue as before; when dry it will be as strong as
+ ever. When the shank is broken off close to the butt, the
+ same treatment will sometimes answer, but the strain here
+ is so much greater that it is sometimes necessary to put in
+ a new shank. In fact, it is always better to do so.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ 2. <i>Flanges, damper heads</i>, and all small wooden parts
+ are liable to break or come unglued. The watchmaker's
+ screwdriver, the binding wire and the glue must always be
+ at hand for these emergencies. These breaks are generally
+ in places where <span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_064"
+ id="Page_064"></a>[Pg 064]</span>wrapping is not
+ permissible, and you are compelled to drill. Keep the
+ screwdriver well sharpened and the drilling is easy.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ 3. <i>Ivories</i>. When unglued, scrape the old glue off,
+ apply glue to both surfaces and clamp with an ivory clamp
+ or rubber band until the glue is firm. Apply the same
+ treatment to ebony sharps.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ 4. <i>Leads</i> in the keys and the dampers of the square
+ piano get loose and rattle. Hammer them just enough to
+ tighten; too much might split the key.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ 5. <i>Friction</i>. Where different materials, such as wood
+ and felt, would rub together they are covered with black
+ lead to lubricate them. The point of the jack where it
+ comes in contact with the butt, the toe of the jack which
+ strikes the regulating button, and the long wooden capstan
+ which takes the place of the extension and works directly
+ on the under side of the wippen, which is covered with
+ felt, are black-leaded. When a key squeaks and goes down
+ reluctantly, the trouble can usually be traced to these
+ places; especially to the wooden capstan, the black lead
+ having worn away. Use powdered black lead on these parts.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ <span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_065"
+ id="Page_065"></a>[Pg 065]</span>
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ There are many things in this kind of work that require
+ only the exercise of "common sense." These we have omitted
+ to mention, treating only of those things the student does
+ not know intuitively.
+ </p>
+ <p class="center">
+ QUESTIONS ON LESSON VI.
+ </p>
+ <ol>
+ <li>
+ When a key snaps or clicks at the instant it is let up,
+ give two or more conditions that might cause it.
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ When a key simply rattles, what parts of the action would
+ you examine for the trouble?
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ When a key is struck and there is no response, what may
+ be the cause?
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ Give two causes for defective damping in a square piano.
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ Give cause of and remedy for a squeaking key.
+ </li>
+ </ol>
+ <hr style="width: 65%;" />
+ <p>
+ <span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_066"
+ id="Page_066"></a>[Pg 066]</span>
+ </p>
+ <h2>
+ <a name="LESSON_VII" id="LESSON_VII"></a>LESSON VII.
+ </h2>
+ <hr style="width: 25%;" />
+ <h3>
+ THE STUDY AND PRACTICE OF PIANO TUNING.
+ </h3>
+ <p>
+ Before commencing the systematic study of piano tuning, we
+ want to impress the student with a few important facts that
+ underlie the great principles of scale building and general
+ details of the art.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ If you have followed the suggestions, and thoroughly
+ mastered the work up to this point you should now have some
+ idea of the natural and artificial phenomena of musical
+ tones; you should have a clear knowledge at least of the
+ fundamental principles of harmony and the technical terms
+ by which we designate intervals and their relation to each
+ other; a knowledge of the general and specific construction
+ of the different types of pianos and their actions, and the
+ methods employed to put them in perfect working condition
+ mechanically. This admitted, we are ready to consider the
+ art of tuningone, <span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_067"
+ id="Page_067"></a>[Pg 067]</span>the appreciation of which
+ is in direct proportion to the understanding of it. Let us
+ now view this art for a moment in its past, present and
+ future phases.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ You may be a little surprised at what we are about to tell
+ you, but it is a fact, gleaned from long experience in
+ traveling and observation, that many, verily, the majority
+ of pretending tuners have not so much practical knowledge
+ of a piano as you should now have. We have no doubt that
+ you, if you have a musical ear, could, without further
+ instruction, improve an instrument that was extremely out
+ of tune. You could detect and improve a tone which you
+ should find extremely sharp or flat; you could detect and
+ improve a unison that might be badly out, and you might
+ produce an entire scale in which none of the chords would
+ be unbearably rasping. But this is not enough. You should
+ aspire to perfection, and not stop short of it.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ It may seem to us who are musicians with thorough knowledge
+ of the simpler laws of music, that a scale of eight tones
+ is a simple affair; simply a natural consequence; the
+ inevitable arrangement; but a historical investigation will
+ prove our mistake. We <span class='pagenum'><a
+ name="Page_068" id="Page_068"></a>[Pg 068]</span>will not
+ go into the complexities of musical history; suffice it to
+ say that the wisest philosophers who lived prior to the
+ fourteenth century had no idea of a scale like that we have
+ at the present day.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ In piano tuning, as in other arts, many theories and
+ conjectures have been advanced regarding the end to be
+ sought and the means by which to gain it. There must be a
+ plana system by which to work. The question is: What plan
+ will insure the most perfect results with the least amount
+ of labor? In Piano Tuning, this plan is called the
+ Temperament.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ Webster defines the word thus: "A system of compromises in
+ the tuning of pianofortes, organs," etc. Later on we will
+ discuss fully what these compromises are, and why they
+ exist; for it is in them that the tuner demonstrates his
+ greatest skill, and to them that the piano owes its
+ surpassing excellence as a musical instrument, and,
+ consequently, its immense popularity. For the present, the
+ term "temperament" may be considered as meaning the plan or
+ pattern from which the tuner works.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ No subject of so great importance in the whole realm of
+ musical science has been so strangely neglected as the
+ method of setting a temperament. <span class='pagenum'><a
+ name="Page_069" id="Page_069"></a>[Pg 069]</span>Even
+ musicians of high learning, in other respects, give little
+ attention to scale building, and hence they differ widely
+ on this topic. There can be but one "best way" of doing a
+ thing, and that best way should be known and followed by
+ the profession; but, strange to say, there are a half dozen
+ systems of setting the temperament in vogue at the present
+ time. The author has, in his library, a book on
+ "Temperament" which, if followed, would result in the
+ production of a scale in which every chord would be
+ unbalanced, harsh and unbearable. This is mentioned merely
+ to call attention to the fact that great differences of
+ opinion exist among scientific men regarding this important
+ subject.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ In the author's practice, he was curious to try the
+ different methods, and has tuned by all the systems of
+ temperament in vogue at the present, or that have ever been
+ used extensively. His experience has proved that all but
+ one is hampered with uncertainty, difficulty of execution
+ or imperfection in some respect.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ A system which will positively insure the strictest
+ uniformity of difference in pitch of any given interval in
+ all the keys, and that makes use of the fewest <span
+ class='pagenum'><a name="Page_070" id="Page_070"></a>[Pg
+ 070]</span>intervals in tuning and the easiest onesthose in
+ which a discrepancy is most readily perceived by the ear,
+ is the best system to adopt and follow. Such a system is
+ the one followed by the author for years with the most
+ satisfying results. He does not claim any high honor by
+ this statement, but does claim that, while his system
+ differs but slightly from some of the others, it is more
+ certain to produce the best results, is the simplest to
+ understand, is the easiest to follow, and, consequently, is
+ the best.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ To become a piano tuner of the highest skill, many things
+ are necessary; but what may be lacking at the outset may be
+ acquired by study and practice. More depends upon the ear
+ than upon anything else; but no person, however talented,
+ has a sufficiently acute perception to tune perfectly
+ without some culture. Some practice in tuning is necessary
+ to bring the ear to that acuteness of perception so
+ indispensable in certain portions of the instrument. It may
+ also be said that no extraordinary talent for music is
+ absolutely necessary, since many of the best tuners are not
+ musicians in any sense of the word. Patience and
+ perseverance, associated with conscientiousness and an
+ insatiable desire to <span class='pagenum'><a
+ name="Page_071" id="Page_071"></a>[Pg 071]</span>excel, are
+ among the foremost requirements. Having these it only
+ remains to gain a thorough knowledge of every detail of the
+ work; a little practice will bring skill and dexterity.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ Finally, we would impress the student with the strenuous
+ importance of thoroughly mastering the lessons which
+ immediately follow. You should be inspired with the utmost
+ confidence, both in yourself and in the possibilities of
+ the profession to those who merit a reputation. And, while
+ this lesson contains little technical instruction, if by
+ its study the pupil is impressed with the maxims herein
+ presented, and is inspired to make earnest effort in his
+ future work, both in acquiring and in practicing the art of
+ Piano Tuning, the author will feel that its mission is, by
+ no means, the least significant one in the course.
+ </p>
+ <hr style="width: 65%;" />
+ <p>
+ <span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_072"
+ id="Page_072"></a>[Pg 072]</span>
+ </p>
+ <h2>
+ <a name="LESSON_VIII" id="LESSON_VIII"></a>LESSON VIII.
+ </h2>
+ <hr style="width: 25%;" />
+ <h3>
+ THE TEMPERAMENT.
+ </h3>
+ <p>
+ Some tuners favor the term, "laying the bearings," others
+ say "setting the temperament." The former is more
+ commonplace, as it merely suggests the idea of laying a
+ number of patterns by which all others are to be measured.
+ The latter term is extremely comprehensive. A lucid
+ definition of the word "temperament," in the sense in which
+ it is used here, would require a discourse of considerable
+ length. The following statements will elicit the full
+ meaning of the term:
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ The untutored would, perhaps, not think of setting a
+ temperament to tune by. He would likely begin at some
+ unfavorable point, and tune by various intervals, relying
+ wholly upon his conception of pitch for the accuracy of the
+ tones tuned, the same as a violinist in tuning his four
+ strings. To be sure, pitch has to be reckoned as a rude
+ guide in setting <span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_073"
+ id="Page_073"></a>[Pg 073]</span>the tones; but if pitch
+ alone were the guide we would never attain to any degree of
+ perfection in scale forming. We could never adjust our
+ tones to that delicate fineness so much appreciated, which
+ gives to the instrument its surpassing brilliancy.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ <b>Beats, Waves, Pulsations.</b> To obtain absolute
+ accuracy the tuner is guided by beats, waves or pulsations.
+ These three words refer to one and the same thing, a
+ phenomenon that occurs in certain intervals when two tones
+ are sounded together that are not in exact tune. These
+ terms must not be confounded with the term "sound wave" or
+ "vibrations" so often used in discussions on the theory of
+ sound. However, we think the student is thoroughly familiar
+ with these terms. The rate of vibration of two tones not in
+ a favorable ratio, may produce the phenomenon known as
+ "beats, waves, or pulsations." Vibrations may exist either
+ with or without pulsations.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ These pulsations are most perceptible in the unison, the
+ octave and the fifth. They are more easily perceived in the
+ unison than in the octave, and more easily in the octave
+ than in the fifth. They are also perceptible in the perfect
+ fourth, the major and <span class='pagenum'><a
+ name="Page_074" id="Page_074"></a>[Pg 074]</span>minor
+ third and some other intervals, but on account of their
+ obscurity, and because these intervals are unnecessary in
+ tuning they have long since been abandoned in "temperament
+ making" (with the exception of the perfect fourth) by most
+ tuners, although a few still make use of it. We do not say
+ that the fourth is unsafe to tune by, but you will see
+ later on why it is not best to make use of it.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ <i>The Fischer System</i> or method of "setting the
+ temperament" has these advantages: It uses but two kinds of
+ intervals: the fifth and octave; by employing two whole
+ octaves in place of one or one and a half, nearly all of
+ the middle section of strings is brought up in pitch which
+ insures that the temperament will stand better while the
+ remaining strings are being tuned; and the alternate tuning
+ of the fifth and octave makes the system exceedingly easy
+ to learn, enabling the tuner to work with less mental
+ strain. Also the two-octave system gives a greater compass
+ for testing, thus insuring greater accuracy.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ If you have access to a piano, it will now be well for you
+ to begin training the ear to perceive the pulsations. If
+ you cannot use a piano, you can train very well by the use
+ of a mandolin, guitar, violin, <span class='pagenum'><a
+ name="Page_075" id="Page_075"></a>[Pg 075]</span>zither, or
+ any stringed instrument. An instrument with metal strings,
+ however, is better, as the vibrations are more perfect.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ You will, of course, know that the front top panel of the
+ case has to be removed to give access to the tuning pins,
+ and that you should have a regular tuning hammer and set of
+ mutes to begin with. The panel is held in place in various
+ ways: sometimes with buttons, sometimes with pins set in
+ slots, and sometimes with patent fastenings; but a little
+ examination will reveal how it may be removed.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ To produce a tone of a certain pitch, the string must be of
+ the right thickness and length. These items are decided by
+ the scale draughtsman in the factory; if incorrect, the
+ tuner can do nothing to improve them.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ To produce the correct pitch, the string must be of the
+ right tension, which is brought about by winding one end of
+ the string around the tuning pin until the proper degree of
+ tension is reached. This must be decided by the ear of the
+ tuner. Two strings of equal thickness and equal length
+ produce the same tone when brought to the same tension; the
+ result being known as "unison." A defect in the unison
+ <span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_076"
+ id="Page_076"></a>[Pg 076]</span>being the easiest way in
+ which to detect the beats, we advise that the student
+ practice on it first.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ After taking out the panel, the first thing to do is to
+ place your rubber mute between two trios of strings (if the
+ piano is an upright which usually has three strings to a
+ note) so that only two strings sound when the key is
+ struck. Select some key near the middle of the keyboard.
+ Strike the key strongly and hold it down. If the two
+ sounding strings give forth a smooth, unwavering tonea tone
+ that sounds as if it came from one string, the unison is
+ perfect. If you find it so, remove the mute and place it on
+ the other side of the trio of strings. If the piano has
+ been tuned recently by an expert, you may have to continue
+ your search over several keys before you find an imperfect
+ unison; but you will rarely find a piano in such perfect
+ tune that it will not contain some defective unisons.
+ However, if you do not succeed in finding a defective
+ unison, select a key near the middle of the key-board,
+ place your mute so that but two strings sound, and with
+ your tuning hammer loosen one of the strings very slightly.
+ Now you will notice a throbbing, beating sound, very unlike
+ the tone produced when the strings were <span
+ class='pagenum'><a name="Page_077" id="Page_077"></a>[Pg
+ 077]</span>in exact unison. See if you can count the beats.
+ If you have lowered the tension too much, the beats will be
+ too rapid to permit counting. Now with a steady and gradual
+ pull, with the heel of the hand against some stationary
+ part, bring the string up slowly. You will notice these
+ waves become slower and slower. When they become quite
+ slow, stop and count, or wave the hand in time with the
+ pulsations. After practicing this until you are sure your
+ ear has become accustomed to the beats and will recognize
+ them again, you may proceed to perfect the unison. Bring
+ the string up gradually as before, and when the unison is
+ reached you will hear one single, simple, musical tone, as
+ though it were from a single string. Never have more than
+ two strings sounding at once. You might go over the entire
+ key-board now and correct all the unisons if the scale is
+ yet fairly good. See which string is, in your opinion, the
+ nearest to correctness with respect to the scale, and tune
+ the other one, or two, as the case may be, to it. If the
+ scale is badly out of symmetry, you will not get very good
+ results without setting a temperament; but the tones will
+ sound better individually. This experiment is more for
+ practice than for improving the piano.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ <span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_078"
+ id="Page_078"></a>[Pg 078]</span>
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ <i>The cause</i> of the waves in a defective unison is the
+ alternate recurring of the periods when the condensations
+ and rarefactions correspond in the two strings and then
+ antagonize. This is known in physics as "interference of
+ sound-waves."
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ <b>The Octave.</b> When perfectly tuned, the upper tone of
+ the octave has exactly double the number of vibrations of
+ the lower. If the lower tone vibrates 1000 per second, the
+ upper will vibrate 2000. Of course, the ear cannot
+ ascertain in any way the number of vibrations per second;
+ we use these figures for scientific demonstration only.
+ However, there is an instrument called the Siren which is
+ constructed for the purpose of ascertaining the number of
+ vibrations per second of any given tone, and which is
+ delicately accurate in its work. By its assistance we know,
+ definitely, a great many things regarding our musical scale
+ of which we would otherwise be ignorant. But, while we
+ cannot, by the ear, ascertain these numbers, we can, by the
+ "interference of sound-waves" above referred to, ascertain,
+ to the most delicate point, when the relative vibration of
+ two strings is mathematically exact, if they are tuned to a
+ unison, octave, fifth, etc.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ <span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_079"
+ id="Page_079"></a>[Pg 079]</span>
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ Practice now on tuning the octave. Find an octave in which
+ the upper tone is flat. Mute all but one string in the
+ lower tone to make sure of getting a pure tone, then select
+ one string (the middle one if a piano has three strings) of
+ the upper octave and proceed to pull it up gradually until
+ all beats disappear. This being done, bring up the unisons.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ <b>The Fifth.</b> In our system, when we speak of a fifth,
+ we mean a fifth upward. The fifth to C is G, to G is D, and
+ so on.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ The vibration of the fifth is one and a half times that of
+ its fundamental. If a certain F vibrates 100, the C, a
+ fifth above, will vibrate 150, if tuned so that no waves
+ are heard; but for reasons which will be fully explained
+ later, the fifth cannot be tuned with mathematical
+ precision. On account of certain peculiarities in our
+ tempered scale, the fifth must always be left somewhat
+ flatter than perfect. This fact is always learned with some
+ astonishment by beginners.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ In your practice on tuning the fifth, first tune it
+ perfectly, so that no waves are perceptible; then flat it
+ so that there are very slow waves; less than one per
+ second. Some authorities say there should be three beats in
+ five seconds; but the tuner must learn <span
+ class='pagenum'><a name="Page_080" id="Page_080"></a>[Pg
+ 080]</span>to determine this by his own judgment. The
+ tempering of the fifth will be treated exhaustively in
+ subsequent lessons.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ We advise that you confine your practice to the unison
+ until you are sure you have a clear conception of its
+ peculiarities in all portions of the key-board, except the
+ extreme lower and upper octaves; do not try these yet. Do
+ not begin to practice on the octave until you are very
+ familiar with the beats in the unison. By gradual progress
+ you will avoid confusing the ear, each step being
+ thoroughly mastered before advancing to the next. Remember,
+ there is nothing that is extremely difficult in learning to
+ tune if you but understand what has to be done, go about it
+ systematically, and have plenty of patience.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ In this lesson we give you our system of setting the
+ temperament; that is, the succession in which the different
+ tones of the temperament are tuned. We advise, however,
+ that you do not attempt to set a temperament until after
+ studying Lesson IX, which enters into the theory of
+ temperament, testing, etc.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ Two octaves are used for the temperament: an octave above,
+ and an octave below middle C. Middle C can be told by its
+ being, the C nearest the name <span class='pagenum'><a
+ name="Page_081" id="Page_081"></a>[Pg 081]</span>of the
+ piano on the name board. In other words, it is the fifth C
+ from the highest C, and the fourth from the lowest in the
+ modern piano, which has seven and a third octaves.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ The diagram illustrates the two octaves of the key-board,
+ and shows how each key is designated in giving the system
+ of temperament.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ <b>Pitch.</b> The Piano Manufacturers' Association has
+ established what is known as "international pitch."
+ Tuning-forks made to this pitch are marked "C-517.3,"
+ meaning that our 3C vibrates 517.3 per second. Concert
+ pitch is nearly a half step higher than this. Some
+ manufacturers still tune their instruments to this higher
+ pitch.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ If it is desired to tune a piano to a certain pitch, say
+ concert pitch, tune the C that is an octave above middle C
+ by a concert pitch tuning-fork or pipe. If, however, the
+ piano is too much below that, it is not safe to bring it up
+ to it at one tuning. But, say it will permit tuning to
+ concert pitch; after this C (3C) is well laid, tune middle
+ C (2C) by it, then tune the C octave below middle C (1C) to
+ middle C. Having 1C for a starting point, proceed by tuning
+ a fifth up, then its octave, then a fifth, then an <span
+ class='pagenum'><a name="Page_082" id="Page_082"></a>[Pg
+ 082]</span>octave, always tuning the octave whichever way
+ is necessary to keep within the two octaves.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ The simplicity of this system can be readily seen; yet for
+ the use of beginners, we give on the following page the
+ whole succession of intervals as they are taken in setting
+ the temperament.
+ </p>
+ <div class="center">
+ <div class="figcenter" style="width: 400px;">
+ <span class="smcap">Diagram of the Two Octaves Used in
+ "Temperament," and of the Succession in Which They Are
+ Tuned<br />
+ <br />
+ </span> <img src="images/image082.png" width="400"
+ height="65" alt="Octaves used in 'Temperament'"
+ title="Octaves used in 'Temperament'" />
+ </div>
+ </div>
+ <p>
+ Middle C begins second octave; known by the asterisk (*)
+ under it.
+ </p>
+ <h3>
+ THE FISCHER SYSTEM OF SETTING TEMPERAMENT.
+ </h3>
+ <p>
+ First, tune 3C by tuning pipe, or as directed.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ By this, tune 2C, and by 2C tune 1C; then tune as follows:
+ </p>
+ <div class="center">
+ <table>
+ <tr>
+ <td>By</td>
+ <td>1C</td>
+ <td>tune</td>
+ <td>1G</td>
+ <td>fifth above,</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>1G</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>2G</td>
+ <td>  octave above,</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>1G</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>2D</td>
+ <td>fifth above,
+ </td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>2D</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>1D</td>
+ <td>  octave below,</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>1D</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>1A</td>
+ <td>fifth above,<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_083"
+ id="Page_083"></a>[Pg 083]</span>
+ </td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>1A</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>2A</td>
+ <td>  octave above,</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>1A</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>2E</td>
+ <td>fifth above,</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>2E</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>1E</td>
+ <td>  octave below,</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>1E</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>1B</td>
+ <td>fifth above,</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>1B</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>2B</td>
+ <td>  octave above,</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>1B</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>2F&#9839;</td>
+ <td>fifth above,</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>2F&#9839;</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>1F&#9839;</td>
+ <td>  octave below,</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>1F&#9839;</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>2C&#9839;</td>
+ <td>fifth above,</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>2C&#9839;</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>1C&#9839;</td>
+ <td>  octave below,</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>1C&#9839;</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>1G&#9839;</td>
+ <td>fifth above,</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>1G&#9839;</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>2G&#9839;</td>
+ <td>  octave above,</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>1G&#9839;</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>2D&#9839;</td>
+ <td>fifth above,</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>2D&#9839;</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>1D&#9839;</td>
+ <td>  octave below,</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>1D&#9839;</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>1A&#9839;</td>
+ <td>fifth above,</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>1A&#9839;</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>2A&#9839;</td>
+ <td>  octave above,</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>1A&#9839;(B&#9837;)</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>2F</td>
+ <td>fifth above,</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>2F</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>1F</td>
+ <td>  octave below,</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>1F</td>
+ <td class="center">try</td>
+ <td>2C</td>
+ <td>fifth above.</td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+ </div>
+ <p>
+ You will observe this last fifth brings you back to the
+ starting-point (C). It is called the "wolf," from the
+ howling of its beats when the tuner has been inaccurate or
+ the piano fails to stand.
+ </p>
+ <p class="center">
+ QUESTIONS ON LESSON VIII.
+ </p>
+ <ol>
+ <li>
+ What is the cause of the beats or pulsations?
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ Have you practiced tuning the unison? <span
+ class='pagenum'><a name="Page_084" id="Page_084"></a>[Pg
+ 084]</span>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ Can you distinguish the beats clearly?
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ Have you practiced tuning the octave?
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ Do you thoroughly understand the system of setting the
+ temperament as set forth in this lesson?
+ </li>
+ </ol>
+ <hr style="width: 65%;" />
+ <p>
+ <span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_085"
+ id="Page_085"></a>[Pg 085]</span>
+ </p>
+ <h2>
+ <a name="LESSON_IX" id="LESSON_IX"></a>LESSON IX.
+ </h2>
+ <hr style="width: 25%;" />
+ <h3>
+ SPECIFIC INSTRUCTIONS IN TEMPERAMENT SETTING.
+ </h3>
+ <p>
+ <b>Pitch.</b> It is a matter of importance in tuning an
+ instrument that it be tuned to a pitch that will adapt it
+ to the special use to which it may be subjected. As
+ previously explained, there are at present two different
+ pitches in use, international pitch and concert pitch, the
+ latter being about a half-step higher than the former. The
+ tuner should carry with him a tuning pipe or fork tuned to
+ 3C in one or the other of these pitches. The special uses
+ to which pianos are subjected are as follows:
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ 1st, As a concert piano. In the opera house, music hall,
+ and occasionally in the church, or even in a private
+ dwelling, the piano is used along with orchestral
+ instruments. All orchestral instruments are supposed to be
+ tuned to concert pitch. The stringed instruments can, of
+ course, be tuned to any pitch; but the brass and wood-wind
+ instruments <span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_086"
+ id="Page_086"></a>[Pg 086]</span>are not so adjustable. The
+ brass instruments are provided with a tuning slide and
+ their pitch can be lowered somewhat, but rarely as much as
+ a half-step, while the clarinet should not be varied from
+ its fixed pitch if it can be avoided. It is desirable,
+ then, that all pianos used with orchestra should be tuned
+ to concert pitch if possible.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ 2d, As an accompaniment for singing. Some persons use their
+ pianos mainly for accompanying. It may be that singers
+ cannot sing high, in which case they are better pleased if
+ the piano is tuned to international pitch, while others,
+ especially concert singers, have their pianos at a higher
+ pitch. Where a piano is used in the home to practice by,
+ and the singer goes out to various places to sing with
+ other instruments, we have always advised to have the piano
+ tuned as near concert pitch as it would bear, for the
+ reason that if one practices with an instrument tuned to
+ concert pitch he may feel sure of reaching the pitch of any
+ instrument he may be called upon to sing with elsewhere.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ The great majority of pianos are left entirely to the
+ tuner's judgment in regard to pitch. The tuner knows, or
+ should know, to what pitch to tune the <span
+ class='pagenum'><a name="Page_087" id="Page_087"></a>[Pg
+ 087]</span>piano to insure the best results. The following
+ suggestions will be found entirely safe to follow in
+ deciding the question of the pitch to which to tune:
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ Ascertain if the piano is used with orchestra, and if
+ clarinets and cornets are used. If so, and the piano is not
+ too much below concert pitch, and bids fair to stand the
+ tension, draw your 3C up to concert pitch and proceed to
+ lay your temperament. If the piano is nearly as low as
+ international pitch, do not try to bring it up at one
+ tuning to concert unless the owner demands it, when you may
+ explain that it will not stand in tune long. The slightest
+ alteration possible, in the pitch of an instrument, insures
+ the best results, so far as standing in tune is concerned.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ If everything be left to your judgment, as it generally is,
+ and the instrument is for general, rather than special use,
+ set your temperament at such a pitch as will require the
+ least possible alteration. This may be arrived at in the
+ following way: Ascertain which portion of the instrument
+ has fallen the most. The overstrung bass strings generally
+ stand better than any other, and in most cases you will
+ find the C which is two octaves below middle C <span
+ class='pagenum'><a name="Page_088" id="Page_088"></a>[Pg
+ 088]</span>to be higher (relatively) than any other C in
+ the piano. If so, take it as a basis and tune by perfect
+ octaves up to 3C.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ The supposition is, that all strings in an instrument
+ gradually grow flatter; and in a well-balanced instrument
+ they should do so; but the fact is, that in certain cases
+ some of the strings will grow sharper. The cause is this:
+ The tension of the strings on one side of a brace in the
+ metal plate or frame is greater than on the other side; and
+ if there is any yielding of the structure, the result is
+ that the overpowered strings are drawn tighter. This
+ condition, however, is rare in the better grade of pianos.
+ Here is a rule which is safe, and will prove satisfactory
+ in ninety-nine per cent. of your practice where no specific
+ pitch is prescribed:
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ Take the three Cs included in the temperament and the C
+ that is an octave below 1C, and try each of them with its
+ octave until you ascertain which is the sharpest with
+ respect to the others; then, bring the others up to it. You
+ now have your pitch established in the Cs and can begin on
+ 1C and proceed to set the temperament. Before applying this
+ rule, it is well to try 3C with tuning pipe or fork to
+ <span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_089"
+ id="Page_089"></a>[Pg 089]</span>see if the piano is below
+ international pitch. We would not advise tuning any modern
+ piano below international pitch. Aim to keep within the
+ bounds of the two prescribed pitches; never higher than
+ concert, nor lower than international. If, however, you
+ should be called on to tune an old instrument that has
+ become extremely low, with very rusty strings, and perhaps
+ with some of them broken, that by all appearances will not
+ stand even international pitch, you may be compelled to
+ leave it somewhat below.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ <b>The Continuous Mute.</b> Do not try to set a temperament
+ without a continuous mute. Its purpose is to mute all
+ outside (1st and 3d<a id="fnanchor_C"
+ name="fnanchor_C"></a><a href="#fn_C"
+ class="fnanchor">[C]</a>) strings of all the trios included
+ in the temperament so that none but the middle strings
+ sound when struck by the hammers. The advantage of this can
+ be seen at once. The tuner tunes only the middle strings in
+ setting the temperament and thereby avoids the confusion of
+ hearing more than two strings at once. The continuous mute
+ is then removed and the outside strings tuned to the
+ middle. Without the continuous <span class='pagenum'><a
+ name="Page_090" id="Page_090"></a>[Pg 090]</span>mute, he
+ would be obliged to tune all three of the strings of the
+ unison before he could tune another interval by it, and it
+ would not be so safe to tune by as a single string, as
+ there might be a slight discrepancy in the unison giving
+ rise to waves which would confuse the ear. The tuner should
+ hear but two strings at once while setting a temperament;
+ the one he is tuning by and the one he is tuning. A
+ continuous mute is a strip of muting felt of the proper
+ thickness to be pushed in between the trios of strings.
+ Simply lay it across a portion of the strings and with a
+ screwdriver push it in between the trios just above where
+ the hammers strike. In the square piano, which has but two
+ strings to a key, the continuous mute cannot be used and
+ you will be obliged to tune both strings in unison before
+ leaving to tune another interval. This is one of the
+ reasons why the square piano does not, as a rule, admit of
+ as fine tuning as the upright.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ It is presumed that you are now familiar with the
+ succession of tones and intervals used in setting the
+ temperament. Fix these things in your mind and the system
+ is easy to understand and remember. Keep within the bounds
+ of the two octaves laid out <span class='pagenum'><a
+ name="Page_091" id="Page_091"></a>[Pg 091]</span>in Lesson
+ X. Tune all fifths upward; that is, tune all fifths by
+ their fundamentals. For example, starting on 1C, use it as
+ fundamental, and by it, tune its fifth, which is G; then,
+ having G tuned, use it as fundamental, and by it tune its
+ fifth, which is D, and so on through. After tuning a fifth,
+ always tune its octave either above or below, whichever way
+ it lies within the bounds of the two octaves. After going
+ through one or two experiments in setting temperament you
+ will see the simplicity of this system and will, perhaps,
+ not be obliged to refer to the diagram any more.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ For various reasons, it is better to try your experiments
+ on an upright piano, and the better the piano, the more
+ satisfactory will be the result of the experiment. You
+ should have no hesitancy or timidity in taking hold of a
+ good piano, as you cannot damage it if you use good
+ judgment, follow instructions, and work carefully. The
+ first caution is, be very careful that you draw a string
+ but slightly sharper than it is to be left. Rest the heel
+ of the hand against some stationary part of the piano and
+ pull very slowly, and in a direct right angle with the
+ tuning pin so as to avoid any tendency to bend or <span
+ class='pagenum'><a name="Page_092" id="Page_092"></a>[Pg
+ 092]</span>spring the pin. We would advise now that you
+ find an upright piano that is badly out of tune, if you
+ have none of your own, and proceed to set a temperament.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ The following instructions will suffice for your first
+ experiments, and by them you may be able to get fairly good
+ results; however, the theory of temperament, which is more
+ thoroughly entered into in Lesson XII, must be studied
+ before you can have a thorough understanding of the causes
+ and effects.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ After deciding, as per instructions on pitch which C you
+ will tune first, place the tuning hammer (using the star
+ head if pins are square) on the pin with the handle
+ extending upwards or inclined slightly to the right. (The
+ star head, which will fit the pin at eight different
+ angles, enables the tuner to select the most favorable
+ position.) To raise the pitch, you will, of course, pull
+ the hammer to the right. In order to make a string stand in
+ tune, it is well to draw it very slightly above the pitch
+ at which it is to remain, and settle it back by striking
+ the key repeatedly and strongly, and at the same time
+ bearing gently to the left on the tuning hammer. The exact
+ amount of over-tension must be learned by practice; <span
+ class='pagenum'><a name="Page_093" id="Page_093"></a>[Pg
+ 093]</span>but it should be so slight as to be barely
+ perceptible. Aim to get the string tuned with the least
+ possible turning of the hammer. The tension of the string
+ should be evenly distributed over its entire length; that
+ is, over its vibrating middle and its "dead ends" beyond
+ the bridges. Therefore it is necessary to strike the key
+ strongly while tuning so as to make the string draw through
+ the bridges. By practice, you will gain control of the
+ hammer and become so expert that you can feel the strings
+ draw through the bridges and the pins turn in the block.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ Having now tuned your three Cs, you will take 1C as a
+ starting point, and by it, tune 1G a perfect fifth above.
+ Tune it perfect by drawing it gradually up or down until
+ all pulsations disappear. Now after making sure you have it
+ perfect, flatten it until you can hear slow, almost
+ imperceptible waves; less rapid than one per second. This
+ flattening of the fifth is called tempering, and from it
+ comes the word "temperament." The fact that the fifth must
+ always be tuned a little flatter than perfect, is a matter
+ which always causes some astonishment when first learned.
+ It seems, to the uninitiated, that every interval should be
+ made perfect; but it is <span class='pagenum'><a
+ name="Page_094" id="Page_094"></a>[Pg 094]</span>impossible
+ to make them so, and get a correct scale, as we shall see
+ later on.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ Now tune 2G by the 1G just tuned, to a perfect octave.
+ Remember that all octaves should be left perfectall waves
+ tuned out. Now try 2G with 2C. If your octaves are perfect,
+ this upper fifth will beat a little faster than the lower
+ one, but the dissonance should not be so great as to be
+ disagreeable. Proceed to your next fifth, which is 2D, then
+ its octave, 1D, then its fifth and so on as per directions
+ on the system card. You can make no chord trials until you
+ have tuned E, an interval of a major third from C.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ Having tuned 2E, you can now make your first trial: the
+ chord of C. If you have tempered your fifths correctly,
+ this chord will come out in pleasing harmony, and yet the E
+ will be somewhat sharper than a perfect major third to C.
+ Now, just for experiment, lower 2E until all waves
+ disappear when sounded with 2C. You now have a perfect
+ major third. Upon sounding the chord, you will find it more
+ pleasing than before; but you cannot leave your thirds
+ perfect. Draw it up again to its proper temperament with A,
+ and you will notice it has very <span class='pagenum'><a
+ name="Page_095" id="Page_095"></a>[Pg 095]</span>pronounced
+ beats when sounded with C. Proceed with the next step,
+ which is that of tuning 1B, fifth to 1E. When tuned, try it
+ as a major third in the chord of G. At each step from this
+ on, try the note just tuned as a major third in its proper
+ chord. Remember, the third always sounds better if lower
+ than you dare to leave it; but, on the other hand, it must
+ not be left so sharp as to be at all unpleasant when heard
+ in the chord. As to the position of the chord for these
+ trials, the second position, that is, with the third the
+ highest, is the most favorable, as in this position you can
+ more easily discern excessive sharpness of the third, which
+ is the most common occurrence. When you have gone through
+ the entire system and arrived at the last fifth, 1F-2C, you
+ should find it nearly as perfect as the rest, but you will
+ hardly be able to do so in your first efforts. Even old
+ tuners frequently have to go over their work a second or
+ third time before all fifths are properly tempered. By this
+ system, however, you cannot go far wrong if you test each
+ step as directed, and your first chord comes up right. If
+ the first test, G-C-E, proves that there is a false member
+ in the chord, do not proceed with the system, but go over
+ the first seven steps <span class='pagenum'><a
+ name="Page_096" id="Page_096"></a>[Pg 096]</span>until you
+ find the offending members and rectify. Do not be
+ discouraged on account of failures. No one ever set a
+ correct temperament at the first attempt.
+ </p>
+ <p class="center">
+ QUESTIONS ON LESSON IX.
+ </p>
+ <ol>
+ <li>
+ Define the terms, "International Pitch," and "Concert
+ Pitch."
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ How would you arrive at the most favorable pitch at which
+ to tune a piano, if the owner did not suggest any certain
+ pitch?
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ What is the advantage in using the continuous mute?
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ Tell what is necessary in the tuning of a string to
+ insure it to stand well?
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ What would result in the major third C-E, if all the
+ fifths, up to E, were tuned perfect?
+ </li>
+ </ol>
+ <hr style="width: 65%;" />
+ <p>
+ <span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_097"
+ id="Page_097"></a>[Pg 097]</span>
+ </p>
+ <h2>
+ <a name="LESSON_X" id="LESSON_X"></a>LESSON X.
+ </h2>
+ <hr style="width: 25%;" />
+ <h3>
+ THEORY OF THE TEMPERAMENT.
+ </h3>
+ <p>
+ The instructions given in Lessons VIII and IX cover the
+ subject of temperament pretty thoroughly in a way, and by
+ them alone, the student might learn to set a temperament
+ satisfactorily; but the student who is ambitious and
+ enthusiastic is not content with a mere knowledge of how to
+ do a thing; he wants to know why he does it; why certain
+ causes produce certain effects; why this and that is
+ necessary, etc. In the following lessons we set forth a
+ comprehensive demonstration of the theory of Temperament,
+ requirements of the correct scale and the essentials of its
+ mathematics.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ <b>Equal Temperament.</b> Equal temperament is one in which
+ the twelve fixed tones of the chromatic scale<a
+ id="fnanchor_D" name="fnanchor_D"></a><a href="#fn_D"
+ class="fnanchor">[D]</a> are equidistant. Any chord will be
+ as harmonious in one key as in another.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ <span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_098"
+ id="Page_098"></a>[Pg 098]</span>
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ <b>Unequal Temperament.</b> Unequal temperament was
+ practiced in olden times when music did not wander far from
+ a few keys which were favored in the tuning. You will see,
+ presently, how a temperament could be set in such a way as
+ to favor a certain key (family of tones) and also those
+ keys which are nearly related to it; but, that in favoring
+ these keys, our scale must be constructed greatly to the
+ detriment of the "remote" keys. While a chord or
+ progression of chords would sound extremely harmonious in
+ the favored keys, they would be so unbalanced in the remote
+ keys as to render them extremely unpleasant and almost
+ unfit to be used. In this day, when piano and organ music
+ is written and played in all the keys, the unequal
+ temperament is, of course, out of the question. But,
+ strange to say, it is only within the last half century
+ that the system of equal temperament has been universally
+ adopted, and some tuners, even now, will try to favor the
+ flat keys because they are used more by the mass of players
+ who play little but popular music, which is mostly written
+ in keys having flats in the signature.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ Upon the system table you will notice that the first five
+ tones tuned (not counting the octaves) are <span
+ class='pagenum'><a name="Page_099" id="Page_099"></a>[Pg
+ 099]</span>C, G, D, A and E; it being necessary to go over
+ these fifths before we can make any tests of the complete
+ major chord or even the major third. Now, just for a proof
+ of what has been said about the necessity of flattening the
+ fifths, try tuning all these fifths perfect. Tune them so
+ that there are absolutely no waves in any of them and you
+ will find that, on trying the chord G-C-E, or the major
+ third C-E, the E will be very much too sharp. Now, let your
+ E down until perfect with C, all waves disappearing. You
+ now have the most perfect, sweetest harmony in the chord of
+ C (G, C, E) that can be produced; all its members being
+ absolutely perfect; not a wave to mar its serene purity.
+ But, now, upon sounding this E with the A below it, you
+ will find it so flat that the dissonance is unbearable. Try
+ the minor chord of A (A-C-E) and you will hear the rasping,
+ throbbing beats of the too greatly flattened fifth.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ So, you see, we are confronted with a difficulty. If we
+ tune our fifths perfect (in which case our fourths would
+ also be perfect), our thirds are so sharp that the ear will
+ not tolerate them; and, if we tune our thirds low enough to
+ banish all beats, our fifths are intolerably flat.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ <span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_100"
+ id="Page_100"></a>[Pg 100]</span>
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ The experiment above shows us beautifully the prominent
+ inconsistency of our scale. We have demonstrated, that if
+ we tune the members of the chord of C so as to get
+ absolutely pure harmony, we could not use the chord of A on
+ account of the flat fifth E, which did duty so perfectly as
+ third in the chord of C.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ There is but one solution to this problem: Since we cannot
+ tune either the fifth or the third perfect, we must
+ compromise, we must strike the happy medium. So we will
+ proceed by a method that will leave our fifths flatter than
+ perfect, but not so much as to make them at all
+ displeasing, and that will leave our thirds sharper than
+ perfect, but not intolerably so.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ We have, thus far, spoken only of the octave, fifth and
+ third. The inquisitive student may, at this juncture, want
+ to know something about the various other intervals, such
+ as the minor third, the major and minor sixth, the
+ diminished seventh, etc. But please bear in mind that there
+ are many peculiarities in the tempered scale, and we are
+ going to have you fully and explicitly informed on every
+ point, if you will be content to absorb as little at a time
+ as you <span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_101"
+ id="Page_101"></a>[Pg 101]</span>are prepared to receive.
+ While it may seem to us that the tempered scale is a very
+ complex institution when viewed as a specific arrangement
+ of tones from which we are to derive all the various kinds
+ of harmony, yet, when we consider that the chromatic scale
+ is simply a series of twelve half-stepstwelve perfectly
+ similar intervalsit seems very simple.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ Bear in mind that the two cardinal points of the system of
+ tuning are:
+ </p>
+ <ol>
+ <li>
+ All octaves shall be tuned perfect.
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ All fifths shall be tuned a little flatter than perfect.
+ </li>
+ </ol>
+ <p>
+ You have seen from Lesson VIII that by this system we begin
+ upon a certain tone and by a circle of twelve fifths cover
+ every chromatic tone of the scale, and that we are finally
+ brought around to a fifth, landing upon the tone upon which
+ we started.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ So you see there is very little to remember. Later on we
+ will speak of the various other intervals used in harmony:
+ not that they form any prominent part in scale forming, for
+ they do not; but for the purpose of giving the learner a
+ thorough understanding of all that pertains to the
+ establishing of a correct equal temperament.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ <span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_102"
+ id="Page_102"></a>[Pg 102]</span>
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ If the instruction thus far is understood and carried out,
+ and the student can properly tune fifths and octaves, the
+ other intervals will take care of themselves, and will take
+ their places gracefully in any harmony in which they are
+ called upon to take part; but if there is a single instance
+ in which an octave or a fifth is allowed to remain untrue
+ or untempered, one or more chords will show it up. It may
+ manifest itself in one chord only. A tone may be untrue to
+ our tempered scale, and yet sound beautifully in certain
+ chords, but there will always be at least one in which it
+ will "howl." For instance, if in the seventh step of our
+ system, we tune E a little too flat, it sounds all the
+ better when used as third in the chord of C, as we have
+ shown in the experiment mentioned on page 94 of this
+ lesson. But, if the remainder of the temperament is
+ accurate, this E, in the chord in which E acts as tonic or
+ fundamental, will be found to be too flat, and its third, G
+ sharp, will demonstrate the fact by sounding too sharp.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ The following suggestions will serve you greatly in
+ testing: When a third sounds disagreeably sharp, one or
+ more fifths have not been sufficiently flattened.<a
+ id="fnanchor_E" name="fnanchor_E"></a><a href="#fn_E"
+ class="fnanchor">[E]</a> <span class='pagenum'><a
+ name="Page_103" id="Page_103"></a>[Pg 103]</span> While it
+ is true that thirds are tuned sharp, there is a limit
+ beyond which we cannot go, and this excessive sharpness of
+ the third is the thing that tuners always listen for.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ The fundamental sounds better to the ear when too sharp.
+ The reason for this is the same as has already been
+ explained above; namely, if the fundamental is too sharp
+ the third will be less sharp to it, and, therefore, nearer
+ perfect.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ After you have gone all over your temperament, test every
+ member of the chromatic scale as a fundamental of a chord,
+ as a third, and as a fifth. For instance: try middle C as
+ fundamental in the chord of C (G-C-E or E-G-C or C-E-G).
+ Then try it as third in the chord A flat (E flat-A flat-C
+ or C-E flat-A flat or A flat-C-E flat). Then try it as
+ fifth in the chord of F (C-F-A or A-C-F or F-A-C). Take G
+ likewise and try it as fundamental in the chord of G in its
+ three positions, then try it as a <span class='pagenum'><a
+ name="Page_104" id="Page_104"></a>[Pg 104]</span>third in
+ the chord of E flat, then as fifth in the chord of C. In
+ like manner try every tone in this way, and if there is a
+ falsely tempered interval in the scale you will be sure to
+ find it.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ You now understand that the correctness of your temperament
+ depends entirely upon your ability to judge the degree of
+ flatness of your fifths; provided, of course, that the
+ strings stand as tuned. We have told you something about
+ this, but you may not be able at once to judge with
+ sufficient accuracy to insure a good temperament. Now, we
+ have said, let the fifths beat a little more slowly than
+ once a second; but the question crops up, How am I to judge
+ of a second of time? The fact is that a second of time is
+ quickly learned and more easily estimated, perhaps, than
+ any other interval of time; however, we describe here a
+ little device which will accustom one to estimate it very
+ accurately in a short time. The pendulum oscillates by an
+ invariable law which says that a pendulum of a certain
+ length will vibrate always in a corresponding period of
+ time, whether it swings through a short arc or a long one.
+ A pendulum thirty-nine and a half inches long will vibrate
+ seconds by a single swing; one nine and <span
+ class='pagenum'><a name="Page_105" id="Page_105"></a>[Pg
+ 105]</span>seven-eighths inches long will vibrate seconds
+ at the double swing, or the to-and-fro swing. You can
+ easily make one by tying any little heavy article to a
+ string of either of these lengths. Measure from the center
+ of such heavy article to the point of contact of the string
+ at the top with some stationary object. This is a sure
+ guide. Set the pendulum swinging and count the vibrations
+ and you will soon become quite infallible. Having acquired
+ the ability to judge a second of time you can go to work
+ with more confidence.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ Now, as a matter of fact, in a scale which is equally
+ tempered, no two fifths beat exactly alike, as the lower a
+ fifth, the slower it should beat, and thus the fifths in
+ the bass are hardly perceptibly flat, while those in the
+ treble beat more rapidly. For example, if a certain fifth
+ beat once a second, the fifth an octave higher will beat
+ twice a second, and one that is two octaves higher will
+ beat four times a second, and so on, doubling the number of
+ beats with each ascending octave.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ In a subsequent lesson, in which we give the mathematics of
+ the temperament, these various ratios will be found
+ accurately figured out; but for the <span
+ class='pagenum'><a name="Page_106" id="Page_106"></a>[Pg
+ 106]</span>present let us notice the difference between the
+ actual tempered scale and the exact mathematical scale in
+ the point of the flattening of the fifth. Take for example
+ 1C, and for convenience of figuring, say it vibrates 128
+ per second. The relation of a fundamental to its fifth is
+ that of 2 to 3. So if 128 is represented as 2, we think of
+ it as 2 times 64. Then with another 64 added, we have 192,
+ which represents 3. In other words, a fundamental has just
+ two-thirds of the number of vibrations per second that its
+ fifth has, in the exact scale. This would mean a fifth in
+ which there would be no beats. Now in the tempered scale we
+ find that G vibrates 191.78 instead of 192; so we can
+ easily see how much variation from the mathematical
+ standard there is in this portion of the instrument. It is
+ only about a fourth of a vibration. This would mean that,
+ in this fifth we would hear the beats a little slower than
+ one per second. Take the same fifth an octave higher and
+ take 2C as fundamental, which has 256 for its vibration
+ number. The G, fifth above, should vibrate 384, but in the
+ tempered scale it beats but 383.57, almost half a vibration
+ flat. This would give nearly 2 beats in 3 seconds.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ <span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_107"
+ id="Page_107"></a>[Pg 107]</span>
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ These figures simply represent to the eye the ratios of
+ these sounds, and it is not supposed that a tuner is to
+ attain to such a degree of accuracy, but he should strive
+ to arrive as near it as possible.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ It is well for the student to practice temperament setting
+ and regular tuning now if he can do so. After getting a
+ good temperament, proceed to tune by octaves upward, always
+ testing the tone tuned as a fifth and third until his ear
+ becomes sufficiently true on the octave that testing
+ otherwise is unnecessary. Tune the overstrung bass last and
+ your work is finished. If your first efforts are at all
+ satisfactory you should be greatly encouraged and feel
+ assured that accuracy will reward continued practice.
+ </p>
+ <p class="center">
+ QUESTIONS ON LESSON X.
+ </p>
+ <ol>
+ <li>
+ What is meant by the term "equal temperament"?
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ What is meant by the term "unequal temperament"?
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ Webster defines the term "temperament" thus: "A system of
+ compromises in the tuning of pianofortes, organs, etc."
+ Explain fully what these compromises are. <span
+ class='pagenum'><a name="Page_108" id="Page_108"></a>[Pg
+ 108]</span>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ In testing chords to ascertain if temperament is correct,
+ what is the main thing to listen for as a guide?
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ In what three chords would you try the tone A, in testing
+ your temperament?
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ With what results have you demonstrated the experiments
+ in this and the previous lesson?
+ </li>
+ </ol>
+ <hr style="width: 65%;" />
+ <p>
+ <span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_109"
+ id="Page_109"></a>[Pg 109]</span>
+ </p>
+ <h2>
+ <a name="LESSON_XI" id="LESSON_XI"></a>LESSON XI.
+ </h2>
+ <hr style="width: 25%;" />
+ <h3>
+ THE TECHNIQUE OR MODUS OPERANDI OF PIANO TUNING.
+ </h3>
+ <p>
+ At this juncture, it is thought prudent to defer the
+ discussion of scale building and detail some of the
+ requirements connected with the technical operations of
+ tuning. We do this here because some students are, at this
+ stage, beginning to tune and unless instructed in these
+ things will take hold of the work in an unfavorable way
+ and, perhaps, form habits that will be hard to break.
+ Especially is this so in the matter of setting the mutes or
+ wedges. As to our discussion of scale building, we shall
+ take that up again, that you may be more thoroughly
+ informed on that subject.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ Some mechanics do more work in a given time than others, do
+ it as well or better, and with less exertion. This is
+ because they have method or system in their work so that
+ there are no movements <span class='pagenum'><a
+ name="Page_110" id="Page_110"></a>[Pg 110]</span>lost.
+ Every motion is made to count for the advancement of the
+ cause. Others go about things in a reckless way, taking no
+ thought as to time and labor-saving methods.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ In spite of any instruction that can be given, the beginner
+ in piano tuning will not be able to take hold of his work
+ with the ease and the grace of the veteran, nor will he
+ ever be able to work with great accuracy and expedition
+ unless he has a systematic method of doing the various
+ things incident to his profession.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ In this lesson, as its subject implies, we endeavor to tell
+ you just how to begin and the way to proceed, step by step,
+ through the work, to obtain the best results in the
+ shortest time, with the greatest ease and the least
+ confusion.
+ </p>
+ <p class="center smcap">
+ Manipulation of the Tuning Hammer.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ It may seem that the tightening of a string by turning a
+ pin, around which it is wound, by the aid of an instrument
+ fitting its square end, is such a simple operation that it
+ should require no skill. Simply tightening a string in this
+ manner is, to be sure, a simple matter; but there is a
+ definite degree of tension at which the <i>vibrating
+ section</i> of the string <span class='pagenum'><a
+ name="Page_111" id="Page_111"></a>[Pg 111]</span>must be
+ left, and it should be left in such a condition that the
+ tension will remain invariable, or as near so as is
+ possible. The only means given the tuner by which he is to
+ bring about this condition are his tuning hammer and the
+ key of the piano, with its mechanism, whereby he may strike
+ the string he is tuning.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ The purpose of the tuning hammer is that of altering the
+ tension. The purpose of striking the string by means of the
+ key is twofold: first, to ascertain the pitch of the
+ string, and second, to equalize the tension of the string
+ over its entire length. Consider the string in its three
+ sections, viz.: lower dead end (from hitch pin to lower
+ bridge), vibrating section (section between the bridges),
+ and upper dead end (from upper bridge to tuning pin).
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ When placing the hammer on the tuning pin and turning to
+ the right, it is evident that the increased tension will be
+ manifest first in the upper dead end. In pianos having
+ agraffes or upper bridges with a tightly screwed bearing
+ bar which makes the strings draw very hard through the
+ bridge, some considerable tension may be produced in the
+ upper dead end before the string will draw through the
+ bridge and increase the tension in the vibrating middle. In
+ <span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_112"
+ id="Page_112"></a>[Pg 112]</span>other pianos the strings
+ "render" very easily over the upper bridge, and the
+ slightest turn of the hammer manifests an alteration of
+ pitch in the vibrating section. As a rule, strings "render"
+ much more easily through the upper, than the lower bridge.
+ There are two reasons for this: One is, that the
+ construction of the lower bridge is such as to cause a
+ tendency in this direction, having two bridge-pins which
+ stand out of line with the string and bear against it in
+ opposite directions; the other is that the lower bridge is
+ so much farther from the point where the hammer strikes the
+ string that its vibration does not help it through as it
+ does at the upper bridge.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ Now, the thing desired is to have the tension equally
+ distributed over the entire length of the string. Tension
+ should be the same in the three different sections. This is
+ of paramount importance. If this condition does not obtain,
+ the piano will not stand in tune. Yet, this is not the only
+ item of importance. The tuning pin must be properly "set,"
+ as tuners term it.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ By "setting the pins," we mean, leaving it so balanced with
+ respect to the pull of the string that it will neither
+ yield to the pull of the string nor tend to <span
+ class='pagenum'><a name="Page_113" id="Page_113"></a>[Pg
+ 113]</span>draw it tighter. Coming now to the exact
+ manipulation of the tuning hammer, there are some important
+ items to consider.<a id="fnanchor_F"
+ name="fnanchor_F"></a><a href="#fn_F"
+ class="fnanchor">[F]</a> Now, if the tuning hammer is
+ placed upon the tuning pin with the handle straight upward,
+ and it is pulled backward (from the tuner) just a little,
+ before it is turned to the right, the tension will be
+ increased somewhat before the pin is turned, as this
+ motion, slight as it may seem, pulls the pin upward enough
+ to draw the string through the upper bridge an
+ infinitesimally small distance, but enough to be
+ perceptible to the ear. Now if the hammer were removed, the
+ tendency of the pin would be to yield to the pull of the
+ string; but if the pin is turned enough to take up such
+ amount of string as was pulled through the bridge, and, as
+ it is turned, is allowed to yield downward toward the pull
+ of the string, it will resume its balance and the string
+ will stand at that pitch, provided it has been "rendered"
+ properly over the bridges.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ We set forth these details that you may have a thorough
+ understanding of what is meant by setting the pins, and
+ while it is not always advisable to <span
+ class='pagenum'><a name="Page_114" id="Page_114"></a>[Pg
+ 114]</span>follow this method in tuning, there are some
+ pianos that will stand more satisfactorily when treated in
+ this way. This method is recommended where the string has
+ become rusty at the upper bridge, as it is loosened at the
+ bridge before it is started to wind around the pin which
+ prevents it breaking at that point. We believe that ninety
+ per cent. of strings break right where they start around
+ tuning pin. A very good way to draw a string up is to give
+ the hammer an alternate up and down motion, pulling the
+ handle lightly to you, then from you, as you draw it up;
+ not enough to bend or break the pin or to crush the wood
+ around the pin, but just enough to make the string take on
+ its increased tension equally.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ In regard to the lower bridge, the strings will rarely
+ "render" through them properly unless brought to a tension
+ a little higher than it is desired they shall be left. If
+ this is done, a few sharp blows of key will generally make
+ them equalize all right; then press the hammer gently to
+ the left, not enough to turn the pin in the socket, but to
+ settle it back to a well-balanced position. After a little
+ practice the tuner can generally guess precisely how much
+ <span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_115"
+ id="Page_115"></a>[Pg 115]</span>over-tension to allow. If
+ the pin is left slightly sprung downward, its tendency will
+ be to spring upward, thereby sharpening the string; so be
+ careful to leave the pins in perfect balance, or as tuners
+ say, "properly set."
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ The foregoing, while applicable to the whole scale, is not
+ so urgent in the over-strung bass. The strings are so heavy
+ and the tension is so great that they will generally
+ "render" quite freely over the bridges, and it is only
+ necessary to bring them up to pitch, handling the hammer in
+ such a manner as to leave the pins well balanced; but it is
+ not necessary to give them over-tension and beat them down
+ again; in fact it is not advisable, as a rule. At all
+ times, place the hammer on the pin as far as it will go,
+ and strike the key while drawing a string up.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ In tuning the square piano, it is not possible to set the
+ hammer upon the pin with the handle in line with, and
+ beyond the string, as is the rule in the upright. Where the
+ square has the square pin, the hammer (with star head) can
+ always be set with the handle to the right of the string
+ somewhat, but usually almost in line with the string and
+ almost directly over it, and the manipulation of the hammer
+ <span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_116"
+ id="Page_116"></a>[Pg 116]</span>is much the same, though
+ the tuner is at a greater disadvantage, the pins being
+ farther from him and he has not such a good rest for his
+ hand. Many old squares have the oblong pin. In this case,
+ use the double hammer head. On the one side the hole in the
+ head is made with the longer diameter in line with the
+ handle, and on the other side the hole is made with the
+ longer diameter at right angles with the handle; so that if
+ you cannot get a favorable position with one end you can
+ with the other.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ We have said nothing about which hand to use in striking
+ the keys and in wielding the hammer, but it is customary to
+ handle the hammer with the right hand and it is always
+ advisable for two very good reasons: It gives the tuner a
+ much more favorable position at the instrument; and, as the
+ right hand is more used in ordinary every-day operations
+ and is more trained in applying degrees of force and
+ guiding tools, it is more easily trained to manipulate the
+ hammer properly. Training the hand in the skilful use of
+ the hammer is of the utmost importance and comes only by
+ continued practice, but when it is trained, one can
+ virtually "feel" the tones with the hammer.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ <span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_117"
+ id="Page_117"></a>[Pg 117]</span>
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ At first, the young tuner is almost invariably discouraged
+ by his slow progress. He must remember that, however fine
+ his ear and however great his mechanical ability, he has
+ much to acquire by training in both, and he must expect to
+ be two or three times longer in finishing off a job of
+ tuning at the outset than will be necessary after he has
+ had a few months' practice. You can be your own trainer in
+ these things if you will do a little rational thinking and
+ be content to "hasten slowly." And as to using the left
+ hand, we would not advise it in any event.
+ </p>
+ <p class="center smcap">
+ Setting the Mutes or Wedges in the Upright.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ As stated in a previous lesson, the mutes should be so
+ placed that only two strings are heard at one time: the one
+ the tuner is tuning, and the one he is tuning by. It is
+ true that this is an easy matter, but it is also true that
+ very few tuners know how to do it in a way to save time and
+ avoid placing the mutes two or more times in the same
+ place. By using a little inventive genius during early
+ practice the author succeeded in formulating a system of
+ muting by which he accomplished the ends as stated <span
+ class='pagenum'><a name="Page_118" id="Page_118"></a>[Pg
+ 118]</span>above, and assures the reader that a great deal
+ of time can be saved by following it.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ After removing the muffler or any other instrumental
+ attachment which may be in the piano in the way of placing
+ the mutes, the first thing to do is to place the continuous
+ mute so that all the outside strings of the trios are
+ damped. The temperament is then set by tuning the middle
+ strings, of the twenty-five trios comprised in the
+ two-octave temperament as demonstrated in a previous
+ lesson. After satisfying yourself by trials or test that
+ the temperament is true, you then remove the continuous
+ mute and proceed to bring the outside strings in unison
+ with the middle one. Now, your 1C is sometimes found to be
+ the first pair in the over-strung bass, which usually has
+ two strings to a key, while in other pianos, 1C is the
+ first trio in the treble stringing, and in many cases it is
+ the second trio in the treble. For illustration, we will
+ say it is the second in the treble. In speaking of the
+ separate strings of a trio we will number them 1st, 2d, and
+ 3d, from left to right, as in foot-note, page 89, Lesson
+ IX. Setting the mutes in bringing up the unisons in the
+ temperament is exceedingly simple.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ <span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_119"
+ id="Page_119"></a>[Pg 119]</span>
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ The following diagram will, we think, demonstrate clearly
+ the method employed:
+ </p>
+ <div class="center">
+ <div class="figcenter" style="width: 600px;">
+ <img src="images/image119.jpg" width="600" height="173"
+ alt="Use of continuous mute"
+ title="Use of continuous mute" />
+ </div>
+ </div>
+ <p>
+ The upper row of O's represents the upper row of tuning
+ pins. To these are attached the first string of each
+ unison. To the middle row are attached the second or middle
+ strings, and to the lower row are attached the third
+ strings. The diagonal lines represent the three strings of
+ the unison (trio). The asterisk on the middle one indicates
+ that it has been tuned.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ But one mute is used in tuning these unisons. It is
+ inserted between the trios in the order indicated by the
+ figures 1, 2, 3, etc. When inserted in place 1, between
+ unisons B and C, it will mute the first string of C; so the
+ first string of the trio to tune is always the third. Then
+ place your mute in place 2 and tune the first string of C.
+ Then, without moving your mute, bring up third string of
+ C&#9839;, <span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_120"
+ id="Page_120"></a>[Pg 120]</span>then third string of D and
+ so on. By this method, you tune two strings every time you
+ reset your mute.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ When through with the temperament, the next step is usually
+ that of tuning the bass; but while we are in the treble we
+ will proceed to give the method of setting the mutes in the
+ upper treble beyond the temperament. All three strings have
+ yet to be tuned here, and we have to use two mutes. The
+ unisons are tuned in regular succession upward the same as
+ in the example above. The mute that is kept farthest to the
+ left, is indicated by the letter A, and the one kept to the
+ right, by the letter B, as in diagram below.
+ </p>
+ <div class="center">
+ <div class="figcenter" style="width: 600px;">
+ <img src="images/image120.jpg" width="600" height="80"
+ alt="Use of two mutes" title="Use of two mutes" />
+ </div>
+ </div>
+ <p>
+ The mutes are first placed in the places indicated by the
+ figures 1 and 2, thereby muting first and third strings of
+ the first unison beyond the temperament, which is
+ 3C&#9839;. The middle string of this unison is now tuned by
+ its octave below. (If you have left imperfect unisons in
+ your temperament, rendering it difficult to tune octaves by
+ them, it will be well to <span class='pagenum'><a
+ name="Page_121" id="Page_121"></a>[Pg 121]</span>replace
+ your continuous mute so as to tune from a single string.)
+ Having tuned the middle string of C&#9839;, move mute B to
+ place 3 and tune third string of C&#9839;. Then, move mute
+ A to place 2 and tune first string of C&#9839;. Your mutes
+ are now already set for tuning the middle string of D.
+ After this is done, proceed to move mute B first, then mute
+ A; tuning middle string, then third, then first, moving
+ step by step as indicated in example above until the last
+ unison is reached. By this system you tune three strings
+ every time the mutes are set twice.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ The over-strung bass usually has but two strings to a
+ unison and only one mute is needed. In the extreme low or
+ contra-bass, pianos have but one string, in tuning which
+ the mute is discarded. Set the mute as indicated by the
+ figures 1, 2, 3, etc., in the diagram below, always tuning
+ the string farthest to the right by its octave above; then
+ move the mute to its next place and tune the left string by
+ the right. Here, again, you tune two strings every time you
+ reset your mute. The I's represent bass strings.
+ </p>
+ <div class="center">
+ <div class="figcenter" style="width: 600px;">
+ <img src="images/image121.jpg" width="600" height="85"
+ alt="Tuning the Bass" title="Tuning the Bass" />
+ </div>
+ </div>
+ <p>
+ <span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_122"
+ id="Page_122"></a>[Pg 122]</span>
+ </p>
+ <p class="center smcap">
+ Setting the Mutes in the Square Piano.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ In setting the temperament in the square piano, simply mute
+ the string farthest to the left and tune the one to the
+ right until the temperament is finished, then set the mutes
+ in the bass the same as in the upright. In tuning the
+ treble, if the piano has three strings, the same system is
+ used as has been described for the upright. When the piano
+ has but two strings to a unison, as is usually the case,
+ employ the system described for the bass of the upright,
+ but reversed, as you are proceeding to the right instead of
+ to the left.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ Remove the shade before beginning to tune a square piano,
+ and if necessary, lay the dampers back and trace the
+ strings to their pins so as to mark them. Certain pins are
+ marked to guide the tuner in placing his hammer. The way we
+ have always marked them is as follows:
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ Mark both pins of each pair of C strings with white crayon.
+ Mark only one pin of each pair of G's. Knowing the
+ intervals of the other keys from the marked ones, you can
+ easily calculate correctly, <span class='pagenum'><a
+ name="Page_123" id="Page_123"></a>[Pg 123]</span>upon which
+ pin to set your hammer to tune any string desired. For
+ instance, if you are striking D&#9839;, next above middle
+ C, you calculate that, as D&#9839; is the third chromatic
+ interval from middle C, you are to set the hammer on one or
+ the other of the pins belonging to the third pair to the
+ right of the pair marked as middle C. B would be first pair
+ to the left, F&#9839; would be first pair to the left of
+ the marked G, and so on. It is usually necessary to mark
+ only those pairs near the middle of the piano, but we
+ advise the beginner to mark throughout the scale, as by so
+ doing he may avoid breaking a string occasionally by
+ pulling on some other than the one he is sounding. This
+ will occur in your early practice if you do not use
+ caution. And for safety, some tuners always mark
+ throughout.
+ </p>
+ <p class="center">
+ QUESTIONS ON LESSON XI.
+ </p>
+ <ol>
+ <li>
+ By what means is the tuner enabled to make the strings
+ draw through the bridges and equalize the tension
+ throughout their entire length?
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ State conditions that may result from a tuning pin's not
+ being properly set. <span class='pagenum'><a
+ name="Page_124" id="Page_124"></a>[Pg 124]</span>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ In this system of muting, state definitely which string
+ is tuned first after the continuous mute is removed.
+ Which second? Which third?
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ After the unisons are finished in the temperament, which
+ string is tuned next, if we go immediately from the
+ temperament to the over-strung bass? Which second? Which
+ third?
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ Upon beginning to tune the treble beyond the temperament,
+ which string is tuned first? Which second? Which third?
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ (a) How many mutes are used in tuning outside the strings
+ of the temperament?<br />
+ (b) In what proportion is the number of times the mute
+ is changed to the number of strings tuned?
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ (a) How many mutes are used in tuning the treble beyond
+ the temperament?<br />
+ (b) In what proportion is the number of times the mute
+ is changed to the number of strings tuned?
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ Which pairs of pins are marked in the square piano to
+ guide the tuner in placing his hammer? Also, how are they
+ marked? <span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_125"
+ id="Page_125"></a>[Pg 125]</span>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ Having marked your pins as instructed, how would you find
+ the pins belonging to a pair of strings struck by F on
+ key-board? How those struck by G&#9839;?
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ Tell what you can of the requirements necessary to insure
+ that a piano will stand in tune.
+ </li>
+ </ol>
+ <hr style="width: 65%;" />
+ <p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_126"
+ id="Page_126"></a>[Pg 126]</span></p>
+ <h2>
+ <a name="LESSON_XII" id="LESSON_XII"></a>LESSON XII.
+ </h2>
+ <hr style="width: 25%;" />
+ <h3>
+ MATHEMATICS OF THE TEMPERED SCALE.
+ </h3>
+ <p>
+ One of the first questions that arises in the mind of the
+ thinking young tuner is: Why is it necessary to temper
+ certain intervals in tuning? We cannot answer this question
+ in a few words; but you have seen, if you have tried the
+ experiments laid down in previous lessons, that such
+ deviation is inevitable. You know that practical scale
+ making will permit but two pure intervals (unison and
+ octave), but you have yet to learn the scientific reasons
+ why this is so. To do this, requires a little mathematical
+ reasoning.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ In this lesson we shall demonstrate the principles of this
+ complex subject in a clear and comprehensive way, and if
+ you will study it carefully you may master it thoroughly,
+ which will place you in possession of a knowledge of the
+ art of which few tuners of the present can boast.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ In the following demonstrations of relative pitch numbers,
+ we adopt a pitch in which middle C has 256 vibrations per
+ second. This is not a pitch <span class='pagenum'><a
+ name="Page_127" id="Page_127"></a>[Pg 127]</span>which is
+ used in actual practice, as it is even below international
+ (middle C 258.65); but is chosen on account of the fact
+ that the various relative pitch numbers work out more
+ favorably, and hence, it is called the "Philosophical
+ Standard." Below are the actual vibration numbers of the
+ two pitches in vogue; so you can see that neither of these
+ pitches would be so favorable to deal with mathematically.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ International&mdash;3C&ndash;517.3.
+ Concert&mdash;3C&ndash;540.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ (Let us state here that the difference in these pitches is
+ less than a half-step, but is so near that it is generally
+ spoken of as being just a half-step.)
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ Temperament denotes the arrangement of a system of musical
+ sounds in which <i>each one</i> will form a serviceable
+ interval with <i>any one</i> of the others. Any given tone
+ must do duty as the initial or key-note of a major or of a
+ minor scale and also as any other member; thus:
+ </p>
+ <div class="center">
+ <table>
+ <tr>
+ <td>C must</td>
+ <td>serve as</td>
+ <td>1,</td>
+ <td>in the</td>
+ <td>key of</td>
+ <td>C</td>
+ <td>major or</td>
+ <td>C</td>
+ <td>minor.</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>2,</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>B&#9837;</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>B&#9837;</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>3,</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>A&#9837;</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>A</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>4,</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>G</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>G</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>5,</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>F</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>F</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>6,</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>E&#9837;</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>E</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>7,</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>D&#9837;</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>C&#9839;</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+ </div>
+ <p>
+ <span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_128"
+ id="Page_128"></a>[Pg 128]</span>Likewise, all other tones
+ of the instrument must be so stationed that they can serve
+ as <i>any member</i> of <i>any scale</i>, major or minor.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ This is rendered necessary on account of the various
+ modulations employed in modern music, in which every
+ possible harmony in every key is used.
+ </p>
+ <p class="center smcap">
+ Rationale of the Temperament.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ Writers upon the mathematics of sound tell us, experience
+ teaches us, and in previous lessons we have demonstrated in
+ various ways, that if we tune all fifths perfect up to the
+ seventh step (see diagram, pages 82, 83) the last E
+ obtained will be too sharp to form a major third to C. In
+ fact, the third thus obtained is so sharp as to render it
+ offensive to the ear, and therefore unfit for use in
+ harmony, where this interval plays so conspicuous a part.
+ To remedy this, it becomes necessary to tune each of the
+ fifths a very small degree flatter than perfect. The E thus
+ obtained will not be so sharp as to be offensive to the
+ ear; yet, if the fifth be properly altered or tempered, the
+ third will still be sharper than perfect; for if the fifths
+ were flattened enough to render the thirds perfect, they
+ (the fifths) would become offensive. Now, it is a fact,
+ that the third will bear greater <span class='pagenum'><a
+ name="Page_129" id="Page_129"></a>[Pg 129]</span>deviation
+ from perfect consonance than the fifth; so the compromise
+ is made somewhat in favor of the fifth. If we should
+ continue the series of perfect fifths, we will find the
+ same defect in all the major thirds throughout the scale.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ We must, therefore, flatten each fifth of the complete
+ circle, C-G-D-A-E-B-F&#9839;-C&#9839;-G&#9839; or
+ A&#9837;-E&#9837;-B&#9837;-F-C, successively in a very
+ small degree; the depression, while it will not materially
+ impair the consonant quality of the fifths, will produce a
+ series of somewhat sharp, though still agreeable and
+ harmonious major thirds.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ We wish, now, to demonstrate the cause of the foregoing by
+ mathematical calculation, which, while it is somewhat
+ lengthy and tedious, is not difficult if followed
+ progressively. First, we will consider tone relationship in
+ connection with relative string length. Students who have
+ small stringed instruments, guitar, violin, or mandolin,
+ may find pleasure in demonstrating some of the following
+ facts thereupon.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ One-half of any string will produce a tone exactly an
+ octave above that yielded by its entire length. Harmonic
+ tones on the violin are made by <span class='pagenum'><a
+ name="Page_130" id="Page_130"></a>[Pg 130]</span>touching
+ the string lightly with the finger at such points as will
+ cause the string to vibrate in segments; thus if touched
+ exactly in the middle it will produce a harmonic tone an
+ octave above that of the whole string.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ Two-thirds of the length of a string when stopped produces
+ a tone a fifth higher than that of the entire string;
+ one-third of the length of a string on the violin, either
+ from the nut or from the bridge, if touched lightly with
+ the finger at that point, produces a harmonic tone an
+ octave higher than the fifth to the open tone of that
+ string, because you divide the string into three vibrating
+ segments, each of which is one-third its entire length.
+ Reason it thus: If two-thirds of a string produce a fifth,
+ one-third, being just half of two-thirds, will produce a
+ tone an octave higher than two-thirds. For illustration, if
+ the string be tuned to 1C, the harmonic tone produced as
+ above will be 2G. We might go on for pages concerning
+ harmonics, but for our present use it is only necessary to
+ show the general principles. For our needs we will discuss
+ the relative length of string necessary to produce the
+ various tones of the diatonic scale, showing ratios of the
+ intervals in the same.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ <span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_131"
+ id="Page_131"></a>[Pg 131]</span>
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ In the following table, 1 represents the entire length of a
+ string sounding the tone C. The other tones of the
+ ascending major scale require strings of such fractional
+ length as are indicated by the fractions beneath them. By
+ taking accurate measurements you can demonstrate these
+ figures upon any small stringed instrument.
+ </p>
+ <div class="center">
+ <table cellspacing="5">
+ <tr>
+ <td class="center smcap">Fundamental</td>
+ <td class="center smcap">Major<br />Second</td>
+ <td class="center smcap">Major<br />Third</td>
+ <td class="center smcap">Perfect<br />Fourth</td>
+ <td class="center smcap">Perfect<br />Fifth</td>
+ <td class="center smcap">Major<br />Sixth</td>
+ <td class="center smcap">Major<br />Seventh</td>
+ <td class="center smcap">Octave</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="center smcap">C</td>
+ <td class="center smcap">D</td>
+ <td class="center smcap">E</td>
+ <td class="center smcap">F</td>
+ <td class="center smcap">G</td>
+ <td class="center smcap">A</td>
+ <td class="center smcap">B</td>
+ <td class="center smcap">C</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="center smcap">1</td>
+ <td class="center smcap">8/9</td>
+ <td class="center smcap">4/5</td>
+ <td class="center smcap">3/4</td>
+ <td class="center smcap">2/3</td>
+ <td class="center smcap">3/5</td>
+ <td class="center smcap">8/15</td>
+ <td class="center smcap">1/2</td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+ </div>
+ <p>
+ To illustrate this principle further and make it very
+ clear, let us suppose that the entire length of the string
+ sounding the fundamental C is 360 inches; then the segments
+ of this string necessary to produce the other tones of the
+ ascending major scale will be, in inches, as follows:
+ </p>
+ <div class="center">
+ <table cellspacing="10">
+ <tr>
+ <td class="center">C</td>
+ <td class="center">D</td>
+ <td class="center">E</td>
+ <td class="center">F</td>
+ <td class="center">G</td>
+ <td class="center">A</td>
+ <td class="center">B</td>
+ <td class="center">C</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="center">360</td>
+ <td class="center">320</td>
+ <td class="center">288</td>
+ <td class="center">270</td>
+ <td class="center">240</td>
+ <td class="center">216</td>
+ <td class="center">192</td>
+ <td class="center">180</td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+ </div>
+ <p>
+ Comparing now one with another (by means of the ratios
+ expressed by their corresponding numbers) the intervals
+ formed by the tones of the above scale, it will be found
+ that they all preserve their original <span
+ class='pagenum'><a name="Page_132" id="Page_132"></a>[Pg
+ 132]</span>purity except the minor third, D-F, and the
+ fifth, D-A. The third, D-F, presents itself in the ratio of
+ 320 to 270 instead of 324 to 270 (which latter is
+ equivalent to the ratio of 6 to 5, the true ratio of the
+ minor third). The third, D-F, therefore, is to the true
+ minor third as 320 to 324 (reduced to their lowest terms by
+ dividing both numbers by 4, gives the ratio of 80 to 81).
+ Again, the fifth, A-F, presents itself in the ratio of 320
+ to 216, or (dividing each term by 4) 80 to 54; instead of 3
+ to 2 (=81 to 54multiplying each term by 27), which is the
+ ratio of the true fifth. Continuing the scale an octave
+ higher, it will be found that the sixth, F-D, and the
+ fourth, A-D, will labor under the same imperfections.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ The comparison, then, of these ratios of the minor third,
+ D-F, and the fifth, D-A, with the perfect ratios of these
+ intervals, shows that each is too small by the ratio
+ expressed by the figures 80 to 81. This is called, by
+ mathematicians, the <i>syntonic comma</i>.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ As experience teaches us that the ear cannot endure such
+ deviation as a whole comma in any fifth, it is easy to see
+ that some tempering must take place even in such a simple
+ and limited number of sounds as the above series of eight
+ tones.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ <span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_133"
+ id="Page_133"></a>[Pg 133]</span>
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ The necessity of temperament becomes still more apparent
+ when it is proposed to combine every sound used in music
+ into a connected system, such that each individual sound
+ shall not only form practical intervals with all the other
+ sounds, but also that each sound may be employed as the
+ root of its own major or minor key; and that all the tones
+ necessary to form its scale shall stand in such relation to
+ each other as to satisfy the ear.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ The chief requisites of any system of musical temperament
+ adapted to the purposes of modern music are:
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ 1. That all octaves must remain perfect, each being divided
+ into twelve semitones.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ 2. That each sound of the system may be employed as the
+ root of a major or minor scale, without increasing the
+ number of sounds in the system.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ 3. That each consonant interval, according to its degree of
+ consonance, shall lose as little of its original purity as
+ possible; so that the ear may still acknowledge it as a
+ perfect or imperfect consonance.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ Several ways of adjusting such a system of temperament have
+ been proposed, all of which may be classed under either the
+ head of equal or of unequal temperament.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ <span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_134"
+ id="Page_134"></a>[Pg 134]</span>
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ The principles set forth in the following propositions
+ clearly demonstrate the reasons for tempering, and the
+ whole rationale of the system of equal temperament, which
+ is that in general use, and which is invariably sought and
+ practiced by tuners of the present.
+ </p>
+ <p class="center smcap">
+ Proposition I.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ If we divide an octave, as from middle C to 3C, into three
+ major thirds, each in the perfect ratio of 5 to 4, as C-E,
+ E-G&#9839; (A&#9837;), A&#9837;-C, then the C obtained from
+ the last third, A&#9837;-C, will be too flat to form a
+ perfect octave by a small quantity, called in the theory of
+ harmonics a <i>diesis</i>, which is expressed by the ratio
+ 128 to 125.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ <span class="smcap">Explanation</span>. The length of the
+ string sounding the tone C is represented by unity or 1.
+ Now, as we have shown, the major third to that C, which is
+ E, is produced by <span class="sf">4/5</span> of its
+ length.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ In like manner, G&#9839;, the major third to E, will be
+ produced by <span class="sf">4/5</span> of that segment of
+ the string which sounds the tone E; that is, G&#9839; will
+ be produced by <span class="sf">4/5</span> of <span
+ class="sf">4/5</span> ( <span class="sf">4/5</span>
+ multiplied by <span class="sf">4/5</span>) which equals
+ <span class="sf">16/25</span> of the entire length of the
+ string sounding the tone C.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ <span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_135"
+ id="Page_135"></a>[Pg 135]</span>
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ We come, now, to the last third, G&#9839; (A&#9837;) to C,
+ which completes the interval of the octave, middle C to 3C.
+ This last C, being the major third from the A&#9837;, will
+ be produced as before, by <span class="sf">4/5</span> of
+ that segment of the string which sounds A&#9837;; that is,
+ by <span class="sf">4/5</span> of <span
+ class="sf">16/25</span>, which equals <span
+ class="sf">64/125</span> of the entire length of the
+ string. Keep this last fraction, <span
+ class="sf">64/125</span>, in mind, and remember it as
+ representing the segment of the entire string, which
+ produces the upper C by the succession of three perfectly
+ tuned major thirds.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ Now, let us refer to the law which says that a perfect
+ octave is obtained from the exact half of the length of any
+ string. Is <span class="sf">64/125</span> an exact half?
+ No; using the same numerator, an exact half would be <span
+ class="sf">64/128</span>.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ Hence, it is clear that the octave obtained by the
+ succession of perfect major thirds will differ from the
+ true octave by the ratio of 128 to 125. The fraction, <span
+ class="sf">64/125</span>, representing a longer segment of
+ the string than <span class="sf">64/128</span> (&frac12;),
+ it would produce a flatter tone than the exact half.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ It is evident, therefore, that <i>all major thirds must be
+ tuned somewhat sharper than perfect</i> in a system of
+ equal temperament.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ <span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_136"
+ id="Page_136"></a>[Pg 136]</span>
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ The ratio which expresses the value of the <i>diesis</i> is
+ that of 128 to 125. If, therefore, the octaves are to
+ remain perfect, which they must do, <i>each major third
+ must be tuned sharper than perfect by one-third part of the
+ diesis</i>.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ The foregoing demonstration may be made still clearer by
+ the following diagram which represents the length of string
+ necessary to produce these tones. (This diagram is exact in
+ the various proportional lengths, being about one
+ twenty-fifth the actual length represented.)
+ </p>
+ <div class="center">
+ <div class="figcenter" style="width: 600px;">
+ <img src="images/image136.jpg" width="600" height="230"
+ alt=""
+ title="Relationship of Length of String to Tone" />
+ </div>
+ </div>
+ <p>
+ This diagram clearly demonstrates that the last C obtained
+ by the succession of thirds covers a segment of the string
+ which is <span class="sf">18/25</span> longer than an exact
+ half; nearly three-fourths of an inch too long, 30 inches
+ being the exact half.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ <span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_137"
+ id="Page_137"></a>[Pg 137]</span>
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ To make this proposition still better understood, we give
+ the comparison of the actual vibration numbers as follows:
+ </p>
+ <div class="center">
+ <div class="figcenter" style="width: 400px;">
+ <img src="images/image137.png" width="400" height="178"
+ alt="" title="Actual vibration numbers" />
+ </div>
+ </div>
+ <p>
+ We think the foregoing elucidation of Proposition I
+ sufficient to establish a thorough understanding of the
+ facts set forth therein, if they are studied over carefully
+ a few times. If everything is not clear at the first
+ reading, go over it several times, as this matter is of
+ value to you.
+ </p>
+ <p class="center">
+ QUESTIONS ON LESSON XII.
+ </p>
+ <ol>
+ <li>
+ Why is the pitch, C-256, adopted for scientific
+ discussion, and what is this pitch called?
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ The tone G forms the root (1) in the key of G. What does
+ it form in the key of C? What in F? What in D? <span
+ class='pagenum'><a name="Page_138" id="Page_138"></a>[Pg
+ 138]</span>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ What tone is produced by a <span class="sf">2/3</span>
+ segment of a string? What by a <span
+ class="sf">1/2</span> segment? What by a <span
+ class="sf">4/5</span> segment?
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ (a) What intervals must be tuned absolutely
+ perfect?<br />
+ (b) In the two intervals that must be tempered, the
+ third and the fifth, which will bear the greater
+ deviation?
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ What would be the result if we should tune from 2C to 3C
+ by a succession of perfect thirds?
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ Do you understand the facts set forth in Proposition I,
+ in this lesson?
+ </li>
+ </ol>
+ <hr style="width: 65%;" />
+ <p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_139"
+ id="Page_139"></a>[Pg 139]</span></p>
+ <h2>
+ <a name="LESSON_XIII" id="LESSON_XIII"></a>LESSON XIII.
+ </h2>
+ <hr />
+ <h3>
+ RATIONALE OF THE TEMPERAMENT.<br />
+ <span class="sf">(Concluded from Lesson XII.)</span>
+ </h3>
+ <p class="center smcap">
+ Proposition II.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ That the student of scientific scale building may
+ understand fully the reasons why the tempered scale is at
+ constant variance with exact mathematical ratios, we
+ continue this discussion through two more propositions, No.
+ II, following, demonstrating the result of dividing the
+ octave into four minor thirds, and Proposition III,
+ demonstrating the result of twelve perfect fifths. The
+ matter in Lesson XII, if properly mastered, has given a
+ thorough insight into the principal features of the subject
+ in question; so the following demonstration will be made as
+ brief as possible, consistent with clearness.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ Let us figure the result of dividing an octave into four
+ minor thirds. The ratio of the length of string sounding a
+ fundamental, to the length necessary to sound its minor
+ third, is that of 6 to 5. In other <span class='pagenum'><a
+ name="Page_140" id="Page_140"></a>[Pg 140]</span>words,
+ <span class="sf">5/6</span> of any string sounds a tone
+ which is an exact minor third above that of the whole
+ string.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ Now, suppose we select, as before, a string sounding middle
+ C, as the fundamental tone. We now ascend by minor thirds
+ until we reach the C, octave above middle C, which we call
+ 3C, as follows:
+ </p>
+ <p class="center sf">
+ Middle C-E&#9837;;  E&#9837;-F&#9839;;  F&#9839;-A;  A-3C.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ Demonstrate by figures as follows:Let the whole length of
+ string sounding middle C be represented by unity or 1.
+ </p>
+ <table cellspacing="5">
+ <tr>
+ <td>E&#9837; will be sounded by 5/6 of the string</td>
+ <td>5/6</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td>F&#9839;, by 5/6 of the E&#9837; segment; that is, by
+ 5/6 of 5/6 of the entire string, which equals</td>
+ <td>25/36</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td>A, by 5/6 of 25/36 of entire string, which equals</td>
+ <td>125/216</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td>3C, by 5/6 of 125/216 of entire string, which equals</td>
+ <td>625/1296</td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+ <p>
+ Now bear in mind, this last fraction, <span
+ class="sf">625/1296</span>, represents the segment of the
+ entire string which should sound the tone 3C, an exact
+ octave above middle C. Remember, our law demands an exact
+ half of a string by which to sound its octave. How much
+ does it vary? Divide the denominator (1296) by 2 and place
+ the result over it for a numerator, and <span
+ class='pagenum'><a name="Page_141" id="Page_141"></a>[Pg
+ 141]</span>this gives <span class="sf">648/1296</span>,
+ which is an exact half. Notice the comparison.
+ </p>
+ <table cellspacing="5">
+ <tr>
+ <td>3C obtained from a succession of exact minor thirds,</td>
+ <td>625/1296</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td>3C obtained from an exact half of the string</td>
+ <td>648/1296</td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+ <p>
+ Now, the former fraction is smaller than the latter; hence,
+ the segment of string which it represents will be shorter
+ than the exact half, and will consequently yield a sharper
+ tone. The denominators being the same, we have only to find
+ the difference between the numerators to tell how much too
+ short the former segment is. This proves the C obtained by
+ the succession of minor thirds to be too short by <span
+ class="sf">23/1296</span> of the length of the whole
+ string.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ If, therefore, all octaves are to remain perfect, it is
+ evident that <i>all minor thirds must be tuned flatter than
+ perfect</i> in the system of equal temperament.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ The ratio, then, of 648 to 625 expresses the excess by
+ which the true octave exceeds four exact minor thirds;
+ consequently, each minor third must be flatter than perfect
+ by one-fourth part of the difference between these
+ fractions. By this means the dissonance is evenly
+ distributed so that it is not noticeable in the various
+ chords, in the major and <span class='pagenum'><a
+ name="Page_142" id="Page_142"></a>[Pg 142]</span>minor
+ keys, where this interval is almost invariably present. (We
+ find no record of writers on the mathematics of sound
+ giving a name to the above ratio expressing variance, as
+ they have to others.)
+ </p>
+ <p class="center smcap">
+ Proposition III.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ Proposition III deals with the perfect fifth, showing the
+ result from a series of twelve perfect fifths employed
+ within the space of an octave.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ <span class="smcap">Method</span>. Taking 1C as the
+ fundamental, representing it by unity or 1, the G, fifth
+ above, is sounded by a <span class="sf">2/3</span> segment
+ of the string sounding C. The next fifth, G-D, takes us
+ beyond the octave, and we find that the D will be sounded
+ by <span class="sf">4/9</span> (<span class="sf">2/3</span>
+ of <span class="sf">2/3</span> equals <span
+ class="sf">4/9</span>) of the entire string, which fraction
+ is less than half; so to keep within the bounds of the
+ octave, we must double this segment and make it sound the
+ tone D an octave lower, thus: <span class="sf">4/9</span>
+ times 2 equals <span class="sf">8/9</span>, the segment
+ sounding the D within the octave.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ We may shorten the operation as follows: Instead of
+ multiplying <span class="sf">2/3</span> by <span
+ class="sf">2/3</span>, giving us <span
+ class="sf">4/9</span>, and then multiplying this answer by
+ 2, let us double the fraction, <span class="sf">2/3</span>,
+ which equals <span class="sf">4/3</span>, and use it as a
+ multiplier when it becomes necessary to double the segment
+ to keep within the octave.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ <span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_143"
+ id="Page_143"></a>[Pg 143]</span>
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ We may proceed now with the twelve steps as follows:
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ Steps
+ </p>
+ <div class="center">
+ <table>
+ <tr>
+ <td>1.</td>
+ <td>1C</td>
+ <td>to</td>
+ <td>1G</td>
+ <td colspan="5"></td>
+ <td>segment</td>
+ <td>2/3</td>
+ <td>for</td>
+ <td>1G</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td>2.</td>
+ <td>1G</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>1D</td>
+ <td>Multiply</td>
+ <td>2/3</td>
+ <td>by</td>
+ <td>4/3,</td>
+ <td>gives</td>
+ <td>segment</td>
+ <td>8/9</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>1D</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td>3.</td>
+ <td>1D</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>1A</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>8/9</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>2/3</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>16/27</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>1A</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td>4.</td>
+ <td>1A</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>1E</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>16/27</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>4/3</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>64/81</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>1E</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td>5.</td>
+ <td>1E</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>1B</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>64/81</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>2/3</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>128/243</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>1B</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td>6.</td>
+ <td>1B</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>1F&#9839;</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>128/243</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>4/3</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>512/729</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>1F&#9839;</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td>7.</td>
+ <td>1F&#9839;</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>1C&#9839;</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>512/729</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>4/3</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>2048/2187</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>1C&#9839;</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td>8.</td>
+ <td>1C&#9839;</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>1G&#9839;</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>2048/2187</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>2/3</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>4096/6561</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>1G&#9839;</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td>9.</td>
+ <td>1G&#9839;</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>1D&#9839;</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>4096/6561</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>4/3</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>16384/19683</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>1D&#9839;</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td>10.</td>
+ <td>1D&#9839;</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>1A&#9839;</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>16384/19683</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>2/3</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>32768/59049</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>1A&#9839;</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td>11.</td>
+ <td>1A&#9839;</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>1F</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>32768/59049</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>4/3</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>131072/177147</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>1F</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td>12.</td>
+ <td>1F</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>2C</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>131072/177147</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>2/3</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>262144/531441</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>2C</td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+ </div>
+ <p>
+ Now, this last fraction should be equivalent to <span
+ class="sf">1/2</span>, when reduced to its lowest terms, if
+ it is destined to produce a true octave; but, using this
+ numerator, 262144, a half would be expressed by <span
+ class="sf">262144/524288</span>, the segment producing the
+ true octave; so the fraction <span
+ class="sf">262144/531441</span>, which represents the
+ segment for 2C, obtained by the circle of fifths, being
+ evidently less than <span class="sf">1/2</span>, this
+ segment will yield a tone somewhat sharper than the true
+ octave. The two denominators are taken in this case to show
+ the ratio of the variance; so the octave obtained from the
+ circle of <span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_144"
+ id="Page_144"></a>[Pg 144]</span>fifths is sharper than the
+ true octave in the ratio expressed by 531441 to 524288,
+ which ratio is called the <i>ditonic comma</i>. This comma
+ is equal to one-fifth of a half-step.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ We are to conclude, then, that if octaves are to remain
+ perfect, and we desire to establish an equal temperament,
+ the above-named difference is best disposed of by dividing
+ it into twelve equal parts and depressing each of the
+ fifths one-twelfth part of the ditonic comma; thereby
+ dispersing the dissonance so that it will allow perfect
+ octaves, and yet, but slightly impair the consonance of the
+ fifths.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ We believe the foregoing propositions will demonstrate the
+ facts stated therein, to the student's satisfaction, and
+ that he should now have a pretty thorough knowledge of the
+ mathematics of the temperament. That the equal temperament
+ is the only practical temperament, is confidently affirmed
+ by Mr. W.S.B. Woolhouse, an eminent authority on musical
+ mathematics, who says:
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ "It is very misleading to suppose that the necessity of
+ temperament applies only to instruments which have fixed
+ tones. Singers and performers on perfect instruments must
+ all temper their intervals, <span class='pagenum'><a
+ name="Page_145" id="Page_145"></a>[Pg 145]</span>or they
+ could not keep in tune with each other, or even with
+ themselves; and on arriving at the same notes by different
+ routes, would be continually finding a want of agreement.
+ The scale of equal temperament obviates all such
+ inconveniences, and continues to be universally accepted
+ with unqualified satisfaction by the most eminent
+ vocalists; and equally so by the most renowned and
+ accomplished performers on stringed instruments, although
+ these instruments are capable of an indefinite variety of
+ intonation. The high development of modern instrumental
+ music would not have been possible, and could not have been
+ acquired, without the manifold advantages of the tempered
+ intonation by equal semitones, and it has, in consequence,
+ long become the established basis of tuning."
+ </p>
+ <p class="center smcap">
+ Numerical Comparison of the Diatonic Scale with the
+ Tempered Scale.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ The following table, comparing vibration numbers of the
+ diatonic scale with those of the tempered, shows the
+ difference in the two scales, existing between the thirds,
+ fifths and other intervals.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ <span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_146"
+ id="Page_146"></a>[Pg 146]</span>
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ Notice that the difference is but slight in the lowest
+ octave used which is shown on the left; but taking the
+ scale four octaves higher, shown on the right, the
+ difference becomes more striking.
+ </p>
+ <div class="center">
+ <table cellspacing="5">
+ <tr>
+ <td></td>
+ <td class="smcap">Diatonic.</td>
+ <td class="smcap">Tempered.</td>
+ <td colspan="2"></td>
+ <td class="smcap">Diatonic.</td>
+ <td class="smcap">Tempered.</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td>C</td>
+ <td>32.</td>
+ <td>32.</td>
+ <td></td>
+ <td>C</td>
+ <td>512.</td>
+ <td>512.</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td>D</td>
+ <td>36.</td>
+ <td>35.92</td>
+ <td></td>
+ <td>D</td>
+ <td>576.</td>
+ <td>574.70</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td>E</td>
+ <td>40.</td>
+ <td>40.32</td>
+ <td></td>
+ <td>E</td>
+ <td>640.</td>
+ <td>645.08</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td>F</td>
+ <td>42.66</td>
+ <td>42.71</td>
+ <td></td>
+ <td>F</td>
+ <td>682.66</td>
+ <td>683.44</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td>G</td>
+ <td>48.</td>
+ <td>47.95</td>
+ <td></td>
+ <td>G</td>
+ <td>768.</td>
+ <td>767.13</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td>A</td>
+ <td>53.33</td>
+ <td>53.82</td>
+ <td></td>
+ <td>A</td>
+ <td>853.33</td>
+ <td>861.08</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td>B</td>
+ <td>60.</td>
+ <td>60.41</td>
+ <td></td>
+ <td>B</td>
+ <td>960.</td>
+ <td>966.53</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td>C</td>
+ <td>64.</td>
+ <td>64.</td>
+ <td></td>
+ <td>C</td>
+ <td>1024.</td>
+ <td>1024.</td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+ </div>
+ <p>
+ Following this paragraph we give a reference table in which
+ the numbers are given for four consecutive octaves,
+ calculated for the system of equal temperament. Each column
+ represents an octave. The first two columns cover the tones
+ of the two octaves used in setting the temperament by our
+ system.
+ </p>
+ <p class="center sf">
+ TABLE OF VIBRATIONS PER SECOND.
+ </p>
+ <div class="center">
+ <table cellspacing="5">
+ <tr>
+ <td>C</td>
+ <td>128.</td>
+ <td>256.</td>
+ <td>512.</td>
+ <td>1024.</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td>C&#9839;</td>
+ <td>135.61</td>
+ <td>271.22</td>
+ <td>542.44</td>
+ <td>1084.89</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td>D</td>
+ <td>143.68</td>
+ <td>287.35</td>
+ <td>574.70</td>
+ <td>1149.40</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td>D&#9839;</td>
+ <td>152.22</td>
+ <td>304.44</td>
+ <td>608.87</td>
+ <td>1217.75</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td>E</td>
+ <td>161.27</td>
+ <td>322.54</td>
+ <td>645.08</td>
+ <td>1290.16</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td>F</td>
+ <td>170.86</td>
+ <td>341.72</td>
+ <td>683.44</td>
+ <td>1366.87</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td>F&#9839;</td>
+ <td>181.02</td>
+ <td>362.04</td>
+ <td>724.08</td>
+ <td>1448.15<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_147"
+ id="Page_147"></a>[Pg 147]</span></td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td>G</td>
+ <td>191.78</td>
+ <td>383.57</td>
+ <td>767.13</td>
+ <td>1534.27</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td>G&#9839;</td>
+ <td>203.19</td>
+ <td>406.37</td>
+ <td>812.75</td>
+ <td>1625.50</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td>A</td>
+ <td>215.27</td>
+ <td>430.54</td>
+ <td>861.08</td>
+ <td>1722.16</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td>A&#9839;</td>
+ <td>228.07</td>
+ <td>456.14</td>
+ <td>912.28</td>
+ <td>1824.56</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td>B</td>
+ <td>241.63</td>
+ <td>483.26</td>
+ <td>966.53</td>
+ <td>1933.06</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td>C</td>
+ <td>256.</td>
+ <td>512.</td>
+ <td>1024.</td>
+ <td>2048.</td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+ </div>
+ <p>
+ Much interesting and valuable exercise may be derived from
+ the investigation of this table by figuring out what
+ certain intervals would be if exact, and then comparing
+ them with the figures shown in this tempered scale. To do
+ this, select two notes and ascertain what interval the
+ higher forms to the lower; then, by the fraction in the
+ table below corresponding to that interval, multiply the
+ vibration number of the lower note.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ <span class="smcap">Example</span>. Say we select the first
+ C, 128, and the G in the same column. We know this to be an
+ interval of a perfect fifth. Referring to the table below,
+ we find that the vibration of the fifth is 3/2 of, or 3/2
+ times, that of its fundamental; so we simply multiply this
+ fraction by the vibration number of C, which is 128, and
+ this gives 192 as the exact fifth. <span class='pagenum'><a
+ name="Page_148" id="Page_148"></a>[Pg 148]</span>Now, on
+ referring to the above table of equal temperament, we find
+ this G quoted a little less (flatter), viz., 191.78. To
+ find a fourth from any note, multiply its number by 4/3, a
+ major third, by 5/4, and so on as per table below.
+ </p>
+ <p class="center sf">
+ TABLE SHOWING RELATIVE VIBRATION OF INTERVALS BY IMPROPER
+ FRACTIONS.
+ </p>
+ <div class="center">
+ <table cellspacing="5">
+ <tr>
+ <td>The</td>
+ <td>relation</td>
+ <td>of the</td>
+ <td>Octave to a</td>
+ <td>Fundamental</td>
+ <td>is expressed by</td>
+ <td>2/1</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>Fifth to a</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>3/2</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>Fourth to a</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>4/3</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>Major Third to a</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>5/4</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>Minor Third to a</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>6/5</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>Major Second to a</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>9/8</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>Major Sixth to a</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>5/3</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>Minor Sixth to a</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>8/5</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>Major Seventh to a</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>15/8</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>Minor Second to a</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>16/15</td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+ </div>
+ <p class="center">
+ QUESTIONS ON LESSON XIII.
+ </p>
+ <ol>
+ <li>
+ State what principle is demonstrated in Proposition II.
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ State what principle is demonstrated in Proposition III.
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ What would be the vibration per second of an exact (not
+ tempered) fifth, from C-512?
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ Give the figures and the process used in finding the
+ vibration number of the <i>exact</i> major third to
+ C-256. <span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_149"
+ id="Page_149"></a>[Pg 149]</span>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ If we should tune the whole circle of twelve fifths
+ exactly as detailed in Proposition III, how much too
+ sharp would the last C be to the first C tuned?
+ </li>
+ </ol>
+ <hr style="width: 65%;" />
+ <p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_150"
+ id="Page_150"></a>[Pg 150]</span></p>
+ <h2>
+ <a name="LESSON_XIV" id="LESSON_XIV"></a>LESSON XIV.
+ </h2>
+ <hr />
+ <h3>
+ MISCELLANEOUS TOPICS PERTAINING TO THE PRACTICAL WORK OF
+ TUNING.
+ </h3>
+ <p>
+ <b>Beats.</b> The phenomenon known as "beats" has been but
+ briefly alluded to in previous lessons, and not
+ analytically discussed as it should be, being so important
+ a feature as it is, in the practical operations of tuning.
+ The average tuner hears and considers the beats with a
+ vague and indefinite comprehension, guessing at causes and
+ effects, and arriving at uncertain results. Having now
+ become familiar with vibration numbers and ratios, the
+ student may, at this juncture, more readily understand the
+ phenomenon, the more scientific discussion of which it has
+ been thought prudent to withhold until now.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ In speaking of the unison in Lesson VIII, we stated that
+ "the cause of the waves in a defective unison is the
+ alternate recurring of the periods when the condensations
+ and the rarefactions correspond <span class='pagenum'><a
+ name="Page_151" id="Page_151"></a>[Pg 151]</span>in the two
+ strings, and then antagonize." This concise definition is
+ complete; but it may not as yet have been fully
+ apprehended. The unison being the simplest interval, we
+ shall use it for consideration before taking the more
+ complex intervals into account.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ Let us consider the nature of a single musical tone: that
+ it consists of a chain of sound-waves; that each sound-wave
+ consists of a condensation and a rarefaction, which are
+ directly opposed to each other; and that sound-waves travel
+ through air at a specific rate per second. Let us also
+ remark, here, that in the foregoing lessons, where
+ reference is made to vibrations, the term signifies
+ sound-waves. In other words, the terms, "vibration" and
+ "sound-wave," are synonymous.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ If two strings, tuned to give forth the same number of
+ vibrations per second, are struck at the same time, the
+ tone produced will appear to come from a single source; one
+ sweet, continuous, smooth, musical tone. The reason is
+ this: The condensations sent forth from each of the two
+ strings occur exactly together; the rarefactions, which, of
+ course, alternate with the condensations, are also
+ simultaneous. <span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_152"
+ id="Page_152"></a>[Pg 152]</span>It necessarily follows,
+ therefore, that the condensations from each of the two
+ strings travel with the same velocity. Now, while this
+ condition prevails, it is evident that the two strings
+ assist each other, making the condensations more condensed,
+ and, consequently, the rarefactions more rarefied, the
+ result of which is, the two allied forces combine to
+ strengthen the tone.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ In opposition to the above, if two strings, tuned to
+ produce the same tone, could be so struck that the
+ condensation of one would occur at the same instant with
+ the rarefaction of the other, it is readily seen that the
+ two forces would oppose, or counteract each other, which,
+ if equal, would result in absolute silence.<a
+ id="fnanchor_G" name="fnanchor_G"></a><a href="#fn_G"
+ class="fnanchor">[G]</a>
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ <span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_153"
+ id="Page_153"></a>[Pg 153]</span>
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ If one of the strings vibrates 100 times in a second, and
+ the other 101, there will be a portion of time during each
+ second when the vibrations will coincide, and likewise a
+ portion of time when they will antagonize each other. The
+ periods of coincidence and of antagonism pass by
+ progressive transition from one to the other, and the
+ portion of time when exactitude is attained is
+ infinitesimal; so there will be two opposite effects
+ noticed in every second of time: the one, a progressive
+ augmentation of strength and volume, the other, a gradual
+ diminution of the same; the former occurring when the
+ vibrations are coming into coincidence, the latter, when
+ they are approaching the point of antagonism. Therefore,
+ when we speak of one beat per second, we mean that there
+ will be one period of augmentation and one period of
+ diminution in one second. Young tuners sometimes get
+ confused and accept one beat as being two, taking the
+ period of augmentation for one beat and likewise the period
+ of diminution. This is most likely to occur in the lower
+ fifths of the temperament where the beats are very slow.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ Two strings struck at the same time, one tuned an octave
+ higher than the other, will vibrate in the <span
+ class='pagenum'><a name="Page_154" id="Page_154"></a>[Pg
+ 154]</span>ratio of 2 to 1. If these two strings vary from
+ this ratio to the amount of <i>one</i> vibration, they will
+ produce <i>two</i> beats. Two strings sounding an interval
+ of the fifth vibrate in the ratio of 3 to 2. If they vary
+ from this ratio to the amount of <i>one</i> vibration,
+ there will occur <i>three</i> beats per second. In the case
+ of the major third, there will occur <i>four</i> beats per
+ second to a variation of <i>one</i> vibration from the true
+ ratio of 5 to 4. You should bear this in mind in
+ considering the proper number of beats for an interval, the
+ vibration number being known.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ It will be seen, from the above facts in connection with
+ the study of the table of vibration numbers in Lesson XIII,
+ that all fifths do not beat alike. The lower the vibration
+ number, the slower the beats. If, at a certain point, a
+ fifth beats once per second, the fifth taken an octave
+ higher will beat twice; and the intervening fifths will
+ beat from a little more than once, up to nearly twice per
+ second, as they approach the higher fifth. Vibrations per
+ second double with each octave, and so do beats.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ By referring to the table in Lesson XIII, above referred
+ to, the exact beating of any fifth may be ascertained as
+ follows:
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ <span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_155"
+ id="Page_155"></a>[Pg 155]</span>
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ Ascertain what the vibration number of the <i>exact</i>
+ fifth would be, according to the instructions given beneath
+ the table; find the difference between this and the
+ <i>tempered</i> fifth given in the table. Multiply this
+ difference by 3, and the result will be the number of beats
+ or fraction thereof, of the tempered fifth. The reason we
+ multiply by 3 is because, as above stated, a variation of
+ one vibration per second in the fifth causes three beats
+ per second.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ <i>Example.</i>Take the first fifth in the table, C-128 to
+ G-191.78, and by the proper calculation (see example, page
+ 147, Lesson XIII) we find the exact fifth to this C would
+ be 192. The difference, then, found by subtracting the
+ smaller from the greater, is .22 ( <span
+ class="sf">22/100</span>). Multiply .22 by 3 and the result
+ is .66, or about two-thirds of a beat per second.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ By these calculations we learn that the fifth, C-256 to
+ G-383.57, should have 1.29 beats: nearly one and a third
+ per second, and that the highest fifth of the temperament,
+ F-341.72 to C-512, should be 1.74, or nearly one and
+ three-quarters. By remembering these figures, and
+ endeavoring to temper as nearly according to them as
+ possible, the tuner will find that his temperament will
+ come up most <span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_156"
+ id="Page_156"></a>[Pg 156]</span>beautifully. This is one
+ of the features that is overlooked or entirely unknown to
+ many fairly good tuners; their aim being to get all fifths
+ the same.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ <b>Finishing up the Temperament.</b> If your last trial,
+ F-C, does not prove a correct fifth, you must consider how
+ best to rectify. The following are the causes which result
+ in improper temperament:
+ </p>
+ <ol>
+ <li>
+ Fifths too flat.
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ Fifths not flat enough.
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ Some fifths correctly tempered and others not.
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ Some fifths sharper instead of flatter than perfect; a
+ condition that must be watched with vigilance.
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ Some or all of the strings tuned fall from the pitch at
+ which they were left.
+ </li>
+ </ol>
+ <p>
+ From a little reflection upon these causes, it is seen that
+ the last trial may prove a correct fifth and yet the
+ temperament be imperfect. If this is the case, it will be
+ necessary to go all over the temperament again. Generally,
+ however, after you have had a little experience, you will
+ find the trouble in one of the first two causes above,
+ unless it be a piano wherein, the strings fall as in Cause
+ 5. This latter <span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_157"
+ id="Page_157"></a>[Pg 157]</span>cause can be ascertained
+ in cases only where you have started from a tuning pipe or
+ fork. Sometimes you may find that the temperament may be
+ corrected by the alteration of but two or three tones; so
+ it is always well to stop and examine carefully before
+ attempting the correction. A haphazard attempt might cause
+ much extra work.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ In temperament setting by our system, if the fifths are
+ properly tempered and the octaves are left perfect, the
+ other intervals will need no attention, and will be found
+ beautifully correct when used in testing.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ The mistuned or tempered intervals are as follows:
+ </p>
+ <div class="center">
+ <table cellspacing="5">
+ <tr>
+ <td class="smcap">Intervals Flattened.</td>
+ <td class="smcap">Intervals Sharpened.</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td>The Fifth, slightly.</td>
+ <td>The Fourth, slightly.</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td>The Minor Third, considerably.</td>
+ <td>The Major Third, greatly.</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td>The Minor Sixth, considerably.</td>
+ <td>The Major Sixth, greatly.</td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+ </div>
+ <p>
+ <b>Tuning the Treble.</b> In tuning the treble, which is
+ always tuned by exact octaves, from their corresponding
+ tones within the temperament, the ear will often accept an
+ octave as true before its pitch has been sufficiently
+ raised. Especially is <span class='pagenum'><a
+ name="Page_158" id="Page_158"></a>[Pg 158]</span>this true
+ in the upper octaves. After tuning a string in the treble
+ by its octave in the temperament, test it as a fifth. For
+ instance, after tuning your first string beyond the
+ temperament, 3C&#9839;, test it as a fifth to 2F&#9839;. If
+ you are yet uncertain, try it as a major third in the chord
+ of A. The beats will serve you as a guide in testing by
+ fifths, up to about an octave and a half above the highest
+ tone of the temperament; but beyond this point they become
+ so rapid as to be only discernible as degrees of roughness.
+ The beats will serve as a guide in tuning <i>octaves</i>
+ higher in the treble than the point at which the beats of
+ the <i>fifth</i> become unavailable; and in tuning
+ <i>unisons</i>, the beats are discernible almost to the
+ last tone.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ The best method to follow in tuning the treble may be
+ summed up as follows: Tune the first octave with the beats
+ as guides both in the octave and in testing it by the
+ fifth. If yet uncertain, test by chords. Above this octave,
+ rely somewhat upon the beats in the octave, still use the
+ fifth for testing, but listen for the pitch in the extreme
+ upper tones and not so much for the beats except in
+ bringing up unisons, in which the beats are more prominent.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ <span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_159"
+ id="Page_159"></a>[Pg 159]</span>
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ In the extreme upper tones, the musical ear of the tuner is
+ tried to the utmost. Here, his judgment of correct harmonic
+ relation is the principal or only guide, while in the
+ middle octaves the beats serve him so faithfully, his
+ musical qualifications being brought into requisition only
+ as a rough guide in determining pitch of the various
+ intervals. To tune by the beats requires a sharp ear and
+ mental discernment; to tune by pitch requires a fine
+ musical ear and knowledge of the simpler laws of harmony.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ As stated above, the tuner will fail in many cases to tune
+ his high octaves sharp enough. Rarely, if ever, will a
+ tuner with a good ear leave the upper tones too sharp. Now,
+ there is one more fact which is of the utmost importance in
+ tuning the treble: it is the fact that the extreme upper
+ octave and a half must be tuned slightly sharper than
+ perfect; if the octaves are tuned perfect, the upper tones
+ of the instrument will sound flat when used in scale and
+ arpeggio passages covering a large portion of the
+ key-board. Begin to sharpen your octaves slightly from
+ about the seventeenth key from the last; counting both
+ black and white. In other words, begin to sharpen from the
+ last A&#9837; but one, in the standard <span
+ class='pagenum'><a name="Page_160" id="Page_160"></a>[Pg
+ 160]</span>scale of seven and a third octaves of which the
+ last key is C. Sharpen but slightly, and increase the
+ degree of sharpening but little as you proceed.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ <b>Tuning the Bass.</b> In tuning the bass, listen for the
+ beats only, in bringing up the octaves. It is sometimes
+ well to try the string tuned, with its fifth, but the
+ octave in the bass should suffice, as the vibrations are so
+ much slower here that if you listen acutely the octave
+ beats will guide you.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ It is not necessary to pull the strings higher than the
+ pitch at which they are to stand. Learn to pull them up
+ gradually and in a way that will "render" the string over
+ the bridges, which is an easy thing to do, the strings
+ being so much heavier here than elsewhere. Never leave a
+ bass string the slightest amount too sharp. As flatness is
+ so obnoxious in the treble, just so is sharpness in the
+ bass, so if there must be any variation in any bass tone
+ let it be flat; but aim at perfect octaves throughout the
+ bass.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ <b>False Waves.</b> We say "false waves" for want of a
+ better name. You will find a string occasionally that will
+ give forth waves or beats so similar to the real ones that
+ it takes a practiced ear to distinguish the difference.
+ Where a unison contains a string <span class='pagenum'><a
+ name="Page_161" id="Page_161"></a>[Pg 161]</span>of this
+ kind, select some other string by which to tune the
+ interval, and leave the bad string until the last; you may
+ then find difficulty in being able to tell when you have it
+ in unison. The cause may be a twisted string, a fault in
+ the string by imperfect drawing of the wire, or in the
+ construction of the sound-board.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ In the low bass tones, a kind of false waves are always
+ present, and will annoy the tuner long after he has been in
+ regular practice. They are, however, of a different nature
+ from the true waves in that they are of a metallic timbre
+ and of much greater rapidity than the latter. Close
+ attention will generally enable the tuner to distinguish
+ between them. They are caused by what is known as
+ "harmonics" or "over-tones"; the string vibrating in
+ fractional segments.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ False waves will occur in an annoying degree when the tuner
+ sets a mute on a nodal point in the string; it will cause
+ the muted string to sound a real harmonic tone. This does
+ not happen in the upright, as the mutes are set so near the
+ end of the string as to preclude this possibility. In the
+ square, however, it very frequently happens, as there are
+ so many nodes between the dampers and the bridge, <span
+ class='pagenum'><a name="Page_162" id="Page_162"></a>[Pg
+ 162]</span>where the tuner sets his mutes. If, for
+ instance, he is tuning an octave and has his mute set
+ precisely in the middle of the vibrating segment, in place
+ of muting the string it sounds its own octave, which will
+ disturb the ear in listening for the tone from the one free
+ string. Move the mute either way until it is found to mute
+ the string entirely.
+ </p>
+ <p class="center">
+ QUESTIONS ON LESSON XIV.
+ </p>
+ <ol>
+ <li>
+ Explain the cause of the beats.
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ How many <i>beats</i> per second in a unison of two
+ strings, one tuned to 100, the other to 101 vibrations
+ per second?
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ How many beats per second in an octave, the lower tone of
+ which is tuned to 100, the upper to 201 vibrations per
+ second?
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ How many beats per second in a fifth, the fundamental of
+ which is tuned to 100, the fifth to 151?
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ The fifth, 2F-3C, when properly tempered, should beat
+ 1&frac34; times per second. How often should a fifth, an
+ octave higher, beat?
+ </li>
+ </ol>
+ <hr style="width: 65%;" />
+ <p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_163"
+ id="Page_163"></a>[Pg 163]</span></p>
+ <h2>
+ <a name="LESSON_XV" id="LESSON_XV"></a>LESSON XV.
+ </h2>
+ <hr />
+ <h3>
+ MISCELLANEOUS TOPICS PERTAINING TO THE PRACTICAL WORK OF
+ TUNING, REGULATING, AND REPAIRING.
+ </h3>
+ <p>
+ <b>Comparison of the Different Systems.</b> Up to this
+ time, we have given no account of any system of tuning
+ except the one recommended. For the purpose of making the
+ student more thoroughly informed we detail here several
+ different systems which have been devised and practiced by
+ other tuners. It is a matter of history that artisans in
+ this profession and leaders in musical science have
+ endeavored to devise a system of temperament having all the
+ desirable qualifications.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ The aims of many have been to invent a system which uses
+ the fewest number of tones; working under the impression
+ that the fewer the tones used in the temperament, the
+ easier the tuner's work. These have reduced the compass of
+ the temperament to the twelve semi-tones from middle C to B
+ above; or from F below, to E above middle C. <span
+ class='pagenum'><a name="Page_164" id="Page_164"></a>[Pg
+ 164]</span>This system requires the tuner to make use of
+ both fourths and fifths. Not only does he have to use these
+ two kinds of intervals in tuning, but he has to tune by
+ fourths up and fourths down, and, likewise, by fifths up
+ and fifths down. When tuning a fifth upward, he flattens
+ it; and when tuning a fifth downward he sharpens the lower
+ tone; when tuning a fourth upward, he sharpens it; when
+ tuning a fourth downward, he flattens the lower tone.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ It is readily seen that by a system of this kind the
+ tuner's mind is constantly on a strain to know how to
+ temper the interval he is tuning, and how much to temper
+ it, as fourths require a different degree of tempering from
+ the fifths; and he is constantly changing from an interval
+ upward to one downward; so, this system must be stamped as
+ tedious and complicated, to say the least. Yet this system
+ is much followed in factories for rough tuning, and also by
+ many old professional tuners.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ The table on the following page gives the succession of
+ intervals generally taken by tuners employing this system
+ using the tones within the F octave mentioned above. Middle
+ C is obtained in the usual way, from the tuning fork.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ <span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_165"
+ id="Page_165"></a>[Pg 165]</span>
+ </p>
+ <p class="center">
+ SYSTEM A.
+ </p>
+ <div class="center">
+ <table cellspacing="5">
+ <tr>
+ <td>By middle</td>
+ <td>C</td>
+ <td>tune</td>
+ <td>F</td>
+ <td>fifth below.</td>
+ <td>Temper</td>
+ <td>sharp.</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td>By</td>
+ <td>F</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>B&#9837; (A&#9839;)</td>
+ <td>  fourth above.</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>C</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>G</td>
+ <td>  fourth below.</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>flat</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>G</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>D</td>
+ <td>fifth above.</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>D</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>A</td>
+ <td>  fourth below.</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>A</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>E</td>
+ <td>fifth above.</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>E</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>B</td>
+ <td>  fourth below.</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>B</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>F&#9839;</td>
+ <td>  fourth below.</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>F&#9839;</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>C&#9839;</td>
+ <td>fifth above.</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>C&#9839;</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>G&#9839;</td>
+ <td>  fourth below.</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>G&#9839;</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>D&#9839;</td>
+ <td>fifth above.</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td>Then try</td>
+ <td>D&#9839;</td>
+ <td>with</td>
+ <td>A&#9839;</td>
+ <td colspan="3">previously tuned for "wolves."</td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+ </div>
+ <p>
+ We think a little study and trial of this system will
+ produce the conviction that it is a very difficult and
+ precarious one, and that it has every disadvantage but one,
+ namely, that it uses the smallest possible number of tones,
+ which is really of little value, and does not compensate
+ for the difficulty encountered and the uncertainty of the
+ results.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ Another system which has many advantages over the above, is
+ one which employs fifths only and covers a compass of an
+ octave and a half. This system is similar to ours in that
+ it employs fifths in the same succession as far as
+ G&#9839;, the most of them, however, being an octave
+ higher. From this G&#9839; <span class='pagenum'><a
+ name="Page_166" id="Page_166"></a>[Pg 166]</span>there is a
+ break in the succession, and the tuner goes back to middle
+ C from which he started and tunes by fifths downward until
+ he reaches the G&#9839; at which he left off. This system
+ employs the tones from F below middle C to C, octave above.
+ Below is the succession, starting upon 3C, whose pitch is
+ determined as usual.
+ </p>
+ <p class="center">
+ SYSTEM B.
+ </p>
+ <div class="center">
+ <table cellspacing="5">
+ <tr>
+ <td class="center">By</td>
+ <td>3C</td>
+ <td class="center">tune</td>
+ <td>2C</td>
+ <td>  octave below.</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>2C</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>2G</td>
+ <td>fifth above.</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>2G</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>1G</td>
+ <td>  octave below.</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>1G</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>2D</td>
+ <td>fifth above.</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>2D</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>2A</td>
+ <td>fifth above.</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>2A</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>1A</td>
+ <td>  octave below.</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>1A</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>2E</td>
+ <td>fifth above.</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>2E</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>2B</td>
+ <td>fifth above.</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>2B</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>1B</td>
+ <td>  octave below.</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>1B</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>2F&#9839;</td>
+ <td>fifth above.</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>2F&#9839;</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>1F&#9839;</td>
+ <td>  octave below.</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>1F&#9839;</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>2C&#9839;</td>
+ <td>fifth above.</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>2C&#9839;</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>2G&#9839;</td>
+ <td>fifth above.</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>2G&#9839;</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>1G&#9839;</td>
+ <td>  octave below.</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td colspan="5" class="center"><hr /></td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="center">By</td>
+ <td>2C</td>
+ <td class="center">tune</td>
+ <td>1F</td>
+ <td>fifth below. Temper sharp.</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>1F</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>2F</td>
+ <td>  octave above.</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>2F</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>1B&#9837;</td>
+ <td>fifth below. Temper sharp.</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>1B&#9837;</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>2B&#9837;</td>
+ <td>  octave above.</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>2B&#9837;</td>
+ <td class="center">"</td>
+ <td>2E&#9837;</td>
+ <td>fifth below. Temper sharp.</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="center">Now by</td>
+ <td>2E&#9837;</td>
+ <td class="center">try</td>
+ <td>1A&#9837; (G&#9839;)</td>
+ <td>fifth below for the "wolf."</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td colspan="5">
+ Note that this last trial brings you back to the last
+ tone tuned before the break.
+ </td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+ </div>
+ <p>
+ <span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_167"
+ id="Page_167"></a>[Pg 167]</span>
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ This system is used by a great number of very successful
+ tuners, and it has but one appreciable disadvantage, which
+ is that involved in changing from fifths upward to fifths
+ downward. This difficulty is easily overcome, if it were
+ all there is to encounter; but in practice, we find that
+ after tuning the intervals in the above succession down to
+ the last step in the first series, middle C will often have
+ changed pitch somewhat, and the last five tones with their
+ octaves tuned from it will not be in true harmony with the
+ intervals tuned in the first series. For this reason it is
+ better to go on through, as in our system, tuning by fifths
+ upward, and if there is any change of pitch in the first
+ tones tuned, they may be more easily corrected by going
+ over them in the same way as at the start; also, the amount
+ of difficulty in locating discrepancies is greatly
+ lessened.
+ </p>
+ <p class="center">
+ SYSTEM C.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ The following system is one that is followed by many good
+ tuners of the present day and has many advantages. To use
+ this system successfully, however, one must be familiar
+ with the number of beats necessary in each interval used.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ <span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_168"
+ id="Page_168"></a>[Pg 168]</span>
+ </p>
+ <div class="blockquot sf">
+ <p class="center">
+ Take 1F as a standard.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ By 1F, tune 2C, fifth above.<br />
+ By 1F, tune 1Bm, fourth above.<br />
+ By 1F, tune 1A, major third above.<br />
+ By 1F, tune 2D, sixth above.<br />
+ By 1F, tune 1Am, minor third above.<br />
+ By 1F, tune 2F, octave above.<br />
+ By 2C or 2D, tune 1G, fourth or fifth below.<br />
+ By 1G, 1A or 2C, tune 2E, sixth, fifth or third
+ above.<br />
+ By 1G or 2E, tune 1B, third above or fourth below.<br />
+ By 1A or A&#9839;, tune 2C&#9839;, major or minor third
+ above.<br />
+ By 1A&#9837;, 1B&#9837; or 1B, tune 2E&#9837;, fifth,
+ fourth or major third above.<br />
+ By 1B&#9837;, 1B, 2C&#9839; or 2E&#9837;, tune
+ 1F&#9839;, major third, fourth, fifth or sixth below.
+ </p>
+ </div>
+ <p>
+ As each step is taken in this system, the tone tuned is
+ tested with any or all of the tones previously tuned.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ You will notice that six tones are tuned by the first
+ standard, F. Therefore, if any error is left in any one of
+ the intervals it exists in this only and is not transmitted
+ to other tones, if corrected before such other tones are
+ used to tune by.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ The numerous tests possible, early in the system, and the
+ small compass used, one octave, may be said to be the chief
+ advantages of the system.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ <span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_169"
+ id="Page_169"></a>[Pg 169]</span>
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ The intervals used are the minor and major third, perfect
+ fourth and fifth, and major sixth. The thirds and sixths
+ beat from about 7 to nearly 12 per second. The exact number
+ of beats for each step in the system may be calculated from
+ the "Table of Vibration Numbers" in Lesson XIII. For
+ instance, take middle C (2C) at 256, and its major third,
+ 2E. The exact third, determined by multiplying 256 by 5/4,
+ is found to be 320. By reference to the table, we find the
+ tempered third vibrates 322.54. The difference then is 2.54
+ vibrations per second, and, knowing that a difference of
+ one vibration from the exact major third produces 4 beats,
+ we simply multiply 2.54 by 4 and we have 10.16, the number
+ of beats we should hear per second when this third is
+ tempered correctly. Other intervals may be figured out in
+ like manner by reference to the various tables given.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ It is very doubtful if a beginner could succeed with this
+ system. He should tune by an easier system until he can
+ hear the beats very distinctly and judge quite accurately
+ the rapidity of them. Having acquired this ability, he may
+ try this system and follow it in preference to others.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ <span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_170"
+ id="Page_170"></a>[Pg 170]</span>
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ In any system used it is well to test your work in the
+ following manner:
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ Begin with your lowest major third and strike each third in
+ succession, ascending chromatically. Of course, each third
+ should beat slightly faster than the one below it. For
+ instance, in our system of two octaves, take 1C-E; this
+ third should beat about 5 per second. Next, take
+ 1C&#9839;-F, which should beat about 5-1/2 per second. The
+ beats should increase each test nearly a half beat, or the
+ amount of 5 beats in this octave; hence, 2C-E will beat
+ about 10 per second; or, using the exact figures, 10.16.
+ After arriving at the last-named test, 2C-E, you may test
+ the remainder of the two octaves by tenths, beginning with
+ 1C-2E. The tenth is similar to the third mathematically,
+ and its beats are even more distinct.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ We may remark here that our system may be reduced to the
+ compass of an octave and a half by simply not tuning the
+ octaves upward which reach beyond 2F&#9839;; and if
+ anything were to be gained and nothing lost by shortening
+ the compass of the temperament, we would advise using only
+ the octave and a half. But in many years of experience in
+ tuning <span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_171"
+ id="Page_171"></a>[Pg 171]</span>all imaginable types,
+ styles and kinds of pianos, and by all systems, we have
+ found good reasons for adopting the two-octave temperament
+ as laid down in Lesson VIII, for universal application. Its
+ advantages may be summed up as follows:
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ <b>Simplicity.</b> But two kinds of intervals are employed:
+ the fifth and the octave. The fifth is always tuned to a
+ fundamental below and hence always flattened, which
+ relieves the tuner of any mental operation to determine
+ which way he is to temper. Being a regular succession of
+ fifths and octaves, without a break, the system is easily
+ learned, and can be followed with little mental strain.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ <b>Uniformity.</b> After the tuner has become well trained
+ in tempering his fifths, there is little danger of an
+ uneven temperament, as the various intervals used in trials
+ will prove a false member in some chord in time to correct
+ it before he has gotten so far from it as to make the
+ correction difficult. When a correction is necessary, the
+ offending point is most easily found.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ <b>Precision.</b> In our experience, we have never known
+ another system by which we could attain the absolute
+ precision gained by this.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ <span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_172"
+ id="Page_172"></a>[Pg 172]</span>
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ <b>Stability.</b> Stability is the feature wherein rests
+ the paramount reason for employing two octaves. From what
+ has been said in previous lessons concerning the liability
+ of some strings to flatten or sharpen by reason of altering
+ the tension of other strings, the student will readily see
+ that the temperament should cover a sufficient portion of
+ the instrument, if possible, to insure that it will stand
+ while the remaining portion is being tuned. Our two octaves
+ cover nearly all the strings between the over-strung bass
+ and the brace in the metal plate. This being the case, any
+ reasonable alteration of the strings beyond, or outside,
+ the braces from the temperament, will rarely, if ever,
+ affect it noticeably.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ <b>Final Inspection.</b> Always test every key on the
+ piano, or especially those of the middle five octaves, for
+ bad unisons. Upon finding one, search for the string that
+ has stood in tune, by testing each string of the unison
+ with its octave. This being done, simply bring the other to
+ it. Go over the whole key-board, striking octaves, and
+ correct any that might offend. One extremely bad tone or
+ octave may disparage your reputation, when in reality your
+ work merits commendation.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ <span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_173"
+ id="Page_173"></a>[Pg 173]</span>
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ <b>Loose Pins.</b> You will occasionally find pianos in
+ which the tuning pins have become so loose that they will
+ not resist the pull of the strings. If many of them are in
+ this condition it is better, before you begin to tune, to
+ take a hammer of considerable weight and drive them a
+ little. Commence at one end of the row of pins and aim to
+ strike all the pins with the same force. Those which are
+ tight enough will not yield to the blow, while those which
+ are loose may require two or three blows to tighten them
+ sufficiently. This defect is generally found in very old
+ squares or cheap uprights wherein the pin-block is of poor
+ material or defective in manufacture or in pianos which
+ have been abused.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ <b>Split Bridges.</b> Even in pianos of the highest grade,
+ we sometimes find a string sounding as if there was a pin
+ or some metallic substance bearing against it. In such
+ cases, find the string and examine the place where it
+ crosses the bridge. You will often find the bridge split at
+ that point or the bridge-pin, having yielded to the
+ pressure of the string, vibrates against the next pin,
+ giving rise to the singing effect. You can do little if
+ anything toward repairing a split bridge. You may, however,
+ <span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_174"
+ id="Page_174"></a>[Pg 174]</span>stop the singing by
+ inserting the point of your screw-driver between the close
+ pins and pressing them apart. This will generally stop the
+ difficulty for the time being at least.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ Strings crossing the bridge near a split will not stand in
+ tune well, and will, perhaps, have to be gone over two or
+ three times. The same may be said of a broken metal plate.
+ Many old squares have broken plates; generally found near
+ the overstrung bass, or within the first octave of the
+ treble. All the tuner can do is to apprise the owner of the
+ defect and inform her that it will not stand well at this
+ point, as the intense strain is thrown largely upon the
+ wooden frame, which will have a tendency to yield gradually
+ to it.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ <b>Stringing.</b> Strings break while the tuner is drawing
+ them up, sometimes because he does not pull them gradually,
+ gives them an abrupt turn or draws them too far above the
+ pitch at which they are intended to stand. More often,
+ however, they break from being rusty at the point where
+ they pass over the bridge or around the tuning pin. The
+ best instruction concerning putting on new strings is,
+ follow appearances. Make the string you put on look <span
+ class='pagenum'><a name="Page_175" id="Page_175"></a>[Pg
+ 175]</span>just like those on the instrument. In most
+ modern pianos the string is wound with three coils around
+ the pin.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ You will, of course, have to take out the action; not the
+ key-board, however, unless it be one of those rare cases
+ where the key-board and upper action are built to come out
+ together. In the square it is only necessary to remove the
+ shade over the dampers, and the dampers, which are all
+ removed easily by taking out the screw at the left. This
+ allows the whole set of dampers with their support to come
+ out together.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ Treble strings are nearly always passed around the
+ hitch-pin, one wire thus forming two strings. Take out the
+ old string, noticing how it passes over and under the felt
+ at the dead end. After removing the string always give the
+ pin about three turns backward to draw it out sufficiently
+ so that when a new string is put on, the pin will turn into
+ the block as far as it did originally. Run one end of the
+ string barely through the hole in the tuning pin and turn
+ it about twice around, taking pains that the coils lie
+ closely; then unwind enough wire (of the same size of
+ course) from your supply to reach down to the hitch pin and
+ back. Place the string on the bridge <span
+ class='pagenum'><a name="Page_176" id="Page_176"></a>[Pg
+ 176]</span>pins properly, draw it as tight as you can by
+ hand and cut it off about three fingers' width beyond the
+ pin upon which it is to be wound. This will make about
+ three coils around the pin. Place the end in the hole and
+ turn up gradually, watching that the string is clear down
+ on hitch pin and properly laid on the bridge. New strings
+ will require drawing up two or three times before they will
+ stand in tune, and even then they will run down in a short
+ time. It is well on this account to leave them slightly
+ sharp, calling the owner's attention to the fact.
+ </p>
+ <div class="center">
+ <div class="figcenter" style="width: 400px;">
+ <img src="images/image176.png" width="400" height="144"
+ alt="Knot for Splicing Wire."
+ title="Knot for Splicing Wire." /> <span
+ class="caption smcap">Knot for Splicing Wire.</span>
+ </div>
+ </div>
+ <p>
+ When a bass string breaks at the point where it starts
+ around the tuning pin, it can nearly always be spliced and
+ the trouble of sending it away to have a new one made be
+ avoided. Take a piece of new wire as large or larger than
+ the old string and splice <span class='pagenum'><a
+ name="Page_177" id="Page_177"></a>[Pg 177]</span>it to the
+ broken end by a good secure knot. A knot called the square
+ or ruft knot is the best for this purpose. When a bass
+ string breaks too far from the pin to permit of a splice,
+ the only resort will be to send the broken string to some
+ factory and have a new one made from it.
+ </p>
+ <p class="center">
+ QUESTIONS ON LESSON XV.
+ </p>
+ <ol>
+ <li>
+ Name the advantages and disadvantages of system A.
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ Name the advantages and disadvantages of system B.
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ What are the important points to be desired in any system
+ of setting temperament?
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ State three or four items of importance in the operation
+ of putting on a new string.
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ Why do pianos get out of tune?
+ </li>
+ </ol>
+ <hr style="width: 65%;" />
+ <p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_178"
+ id="Page_178"></a>[Pg 178]</span></p>
+ <h2>
+ <a name="LESSON_XVI" id="LESSON_XVI"></a>LESSON XVI.
+ </h2>
+ <hr />
+ <h3>
+ TUNING AND REPAIRING THE REED ORGAN.
+ </h3>
+ <p>
+ An impression seems to be prevalent among some musicians of
+ the more advanced class, that the reed organ has gone or is
+ going out of use; in certain communities there appears to
+ be sufficient ground for such an impression; in other
+ communities, however, we find the number of organs largely
+ in excess of the number of pianos. Not only is this the
+ case, but statistics of the various organ factories
+ throughout the United States show that the output is
+ enormous, which is a sufficient assurance that the reed
+ organ is not an obsolete instrument by any means. To be
+ sure, the organ has been superseded in numerous cases by
+ the piano, which is, in many respects, a greatly superior
+ instrument, and, generally speaking, is more popular; yet,
+ the reed organ has its special features of tone quality and
+ adaptation, which render it even more desirable to many
+ than the piano, aside from the fact of its being less
+ expensive.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ <span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_179"
+ id="Page_179"></a>[Pg 179]</span>
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ The musical effects possible on the organ and not on the
+ piano may be few; but they are of no small value, when
+ certain kinds of musical compositions are to be rendered.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ One great point in favor of the organ is, that it is
+ capable of continuing any tone or chord for any length of
+ time, without diminution, while in the piano, the bass
+ tones may be continued for considerable time, the middle
+ tones a shorter length of time, and the extreme high tones
+ of the treble have but the slightest duration; every tone
+ in the piano gradually grows weaker from the instant of its
+ sounding until it fades into silence. Another feature of
+ the organ, not possible in the piano, is its ability of
+ making the "crescendo" (a gradual increase of strength or
+ volume) in single tones or chords. Still another point in
+ favor of the organ (not in the tuner's favor, however) is
+ that it rarely gets out of tune and does not require being
+ gone over by the tuner at short intervals in order to keep
+ it in fit condition to be used.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ The idea with which we desire to impress the student by the
+ foregoing remarks is, that while the piano is a superior
+ instrument, and the art of tuning the piano is a much
+ deeper study from the general tuner's <span
+ class='pagenum'><a name="Page_180" id="Page_180"></a>[Pg
+ 180]</span>standpoint than that of doing the various things
+ the tuner is called to do on the organ, he should not
+ consider the reed organ of minor importance, or slight the
+ organ when called upon to put it in order. The fact is,
+ persons having organs in their homes cherish them as much
+ as others do their pianos, and there is no reason why they
+ should not have as good service.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ It will be impossible to give anything more than general
+ instruction in organ work, as the difference in
+ construction is so pronounced. Pianos are built practically
+ on the same plan, and when the construction of one is
+ learned, the tuner will find little difficulty in others of
+ the same type; but it seems that every organ manufacturer
+ has his own hobbies as to the best means of securing
+ results; however, the general principles are the same, and,
+ like many operations coming under the hand of the tuner,
+ all that is necessary is to examine, reason, and use good
+ mechanical judgment.
+ </p>
+ <p class="center smcap">
+ Cleaning.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ Organs need cleaning about once a year, or oftener if they
+ are kept and used in dusty places. The bellows are suction
+ or exhaustion bellows, and they draw the air in at the top
+ of the organ through <span class='pagenum'><a
+ name="Page_181" id="Page_181"></a>[Pg 181]</span>the reeds
+ and discharge it below. The effect of this is that if any
+ dust is floating in the air it is drawn in about the action
+ and reeds, where it settles and clogs the working parts,
+ stopping the vibration of the reeds entirely.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ The front board or key strip is usually held in place by a
+ screw at each end, but sometimes by slides entering the
+ holes in the side of the case, which may be disconnected by
+ wooden buttons at each end, which are pulled toward the
+ center. The back of all organs may be entered by removing
+ the board at the back of the case, held in place by screws
+ or buttons. Close all the stops, then take your dust
+ blower, if you have one, or a cloth, and remove all the
+ dirt possible in this way. Lift the muffler boards worked
+ by the right knee-swell, take a brush and clean thoroughly
+ next to the reeds which will be exposed when the muffler
+ boards are raised.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ If any dirt is left here it will be drawn into the reeds
+ the instant the organ is played. In bad cases, in fact it
+ is better in every case, to draw every reed, letting them
+ lie in a row on the reed board and going over each one
+ separately, brush the dust from it. This will improve the
+ tone, or, rather, the tune of the <span class='pagenum'><a
+ name="Page_182" id="Page_182"></a>[Pg
+ 182]</span>instrument. Dirt on the tongue of a reed adds
+ sufficient weight to alter the pitch, and if it is removed,
+ the instrument will generally be in as good tune as when it
+ left the factory. Simply cleaning an organ in this way is
+ often called tuning, by inexperienced persons. If it
+ happens that there are only a few reeds that do not speak,
+ and the owner does not care to pay for a thorough cleaning,
+ you will find the silent reeds by the method given under
+ the head "Examination," and, drawing them, clean and
+ replace.
+ </p>
+ <p class="center smcap">
+ Stops.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ Each stop on the organ (if there be no dummies) affects
+ either the tone quality or the power of the instrument. The
+ Vox Humana stop affects the quality of the tone by
+ operating a fan in the rear of the instrument or a
+ contrivance contained in a small box, which produces a
+ tremolo effect. All other stops may be said to affect the
+ power. Stops having such names as Diapason, Melodia,
+ Dulcet, Celeste, Cremona, Echo, Principal, Bourdon, Sub
+ Bass, Piccolo, Flute, Dulciana, etc., etc., open certain
+ sets of reeds supposed to give forth a tone quality similar
+ to the instrument whose name it bears, or the tone of the
+ <span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_183"
+ id="Page_183"></a>[Pg 183]</span>pipes of the pipe organ
+ bearing such names. These stops operate on the sets of
+ reeds by raising the mutes which, when closed, stop the
+ passage of air through the reeds.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ The octave coupler stop, sometimes called Harmonique,
+ controls an arrangement whereby, when a key is depressed,
+ its octave is made to sound also. "Forte" stops lift the
+ mufflers or swells, and as these are controlled by the
+ right knee-swell, the Forte stop may be considered of
+ little value. The left knee-swell, called the Full Organ
+ swell, as its name implies, opens up the full power of all
+ sets of reeds and throws on the couplers.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ A mere peep into any organ will disclose the mechanical
+ working of stops, which is in such great variety that we
+ will not attempt to detail it here.
+ </p>
+ <p class="center smcap">
+ Examination.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ After a little experience you will be able to make an
+ examination of an organ and tell just what it needs without
+ so much as drawing a screw. The reeds are usually divided
+ into treble sets and bass sets; two octaves of bass reeds,
+ and three octaves of treble reeds constitute a set. The
+ Diapason stop is <span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_184"
+ id="Page_184"></a>[Pg 184]</span>nearly always present, and
+ controls the heaviest reeds in the bass except the Bourdon
+ or Sub Bass, if the organ should have either of these. In
+ examining an organ, close all stops but the Diapason, for
+ instance, then successively press every key in the two bass
+ octaves.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ Now if, for instance, a key is found silent, that is, just
+ an octave from the lowest tone, by counting the keys from
+ the lowest tone, you will find the silent key is number
+ thirteen. Look into the organ, find the mute that is up by
+ reason of this Diapason stop's being pulled, and count the
+ reeds from the lowest to the thirteenth; pull the reed and
+ you will find it obstructed or perhaps broken. Most organs
+ have a Dulciana stop in the treble which corresponds with
+ the Diapason in the bass. Test the reeds of this set just
+ as you did those of the Diapason. Go over each set of reeds
+ in like manner. Broken reeds should be sent to the factory
+ where the organ was built. The manufacturers will send a
+ new one, often without cost.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ Stops are sometimes found disconnected from the mutes,
+ which deprives the player of the use of certain sets of
+ reeds, and while it is a small matter <span
+ class='pagenum'><a name="Page_185" id="Page_185"></a>[Pg
+ 185]</span>to connect them, it adds much to the improvement
+ imparted to the instrument by the tuner. After
+ disconnecting the stops for any purpose, always be sure you
+ connect them properly before leaving your work.
+ </p>
+ <p class="center smcap">
+ Sticking Keys.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ The key itself is subject to many of the same faults as is
+ that of the piano. It may bind in the guide pin or warp so
+ as to cause it to stick, or it may stick from some
+ substance between the keys. Sometimes the front board is so
+ near the front of the keys that when the latter are
+ depressed they stick against it. A screw is generally found
+ in the center, the head of which comes against the front
+ board and holds it out. If the board is too near give the
+ screw a turn or two back. If there is no screw, place a
+ piece of card against the board and the case at the ends.
+ The end keys sometimes stick against the blocks at the ends
+ of the key-board. Scrape the block or key where it sticks.
+ A key may stay down because of the cedar pin, sometimes
+ called the tracker pin or pitman, sticking in the hole.
+ Take out the key-board which is held by a screw at each
+ end, sometimes by another in the middle; in which case a
+ <span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_186"
+ id="Page_186"></a>[Pg 186]</span>key or two must be removed
+ to get at it. To remove a key, take off the strip at the
+ back of the keys, held in place by small screws, and the
+ key may be lifted up. Now, finding the sticking pin, pull
+ it out and sandpaper or rub it with black lead until it is
+ found to work quite freely in the guide hole of the guide
+ board and the hole in the reed board.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ Just under the reed board is a wooden slip covered with
+ soft leather, called the valve or pallet, which covers the
+ openings in the reed board which admit air to pass down
+ through the reeds. The tracker pin, pushed down by the key,
+ opens the pallet which is held against the reed board by a
+ spring and kept in place by a guide pin at each end. It
+ sometimes happens that a pallet will be pushed down so far
+ as to catch on the guide pins and cause the tone to sound
+ continually. In other cases a piece of dirt will get in the
+ way of the pallet and prevent it from closing the opening.
+ If this be the case, draw the reeds that sound when this
+ key is depressed and also a reed at each side of it, and
+ pump the bellows briskly, at the same time pressing the
+ three keys. This will generally create enough air to remove
+ the obstacle. If the key still sounds and cannot be made to
+ <span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_187"
+ id="Page_187"></a>[Pg 187]</span>"hush up" in this way, you
+ may be compelled to take out the entire action so that you
+ can get to the pallets, which can be done by removing all
+ the screws that hold the reed board in place. At the back,
+ these screws are on top of the board and sometimes they are
+ on top in front; but often they are under the air chamber
+ in front. Be sure the screws are all out before trying to
+ pull the board loose, as you might crack the board and
+ thereby cause a leak. A moment's notice will reveal the
+ cause of the trouble in the pallet.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ New pallet springs may be made of piano wire, using old
+ springs for a pattern.
+ </p>
+ <p class="center smcap">
+ Leaks.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ If a leak is found in the air boards, such as a crack or
+ split, it can be stopped permanently by gluing a piece of
+ bellows cloth or any good rubber cloth over the split. A
+ leak in the bellows can be repaired in the same way, but if
+ it happens to be a hole at or near a part of the cloth
+ which is compelled to bend in the working of the bellows,
+ you will have to use some kind of rubber or leather cement,
+ preferably the latter. This can be made by dissolving <span
+ class='pagenum'><a name="Page_188" id="Page_188"></a>[Pg
+ 188]</span>gutta-percha in bisulphide of carbon, but a good
+ leather cement may be had at almost any shoe store. If the
+ bellows are porous, it may be well to give them a coat of
+ cement, but never paint them; the paint cracks and the
+ leaks are made worse.
+ </p>
+ <p class="center smcap">
+ Pedal Detects.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ Broken pedal straps are the most frequent annoyance. In all
+ modern organs there is a panel above the pedals which will
+ come out and admit the mechanic to the bellows, straps,
+ springs, etc.; but in some old instruments the case is made
+ solid, in which case the workman must do his work from the
+ bottom, turning the organ down so as to get at it. Pedal
+ straps are easily put on; generally with screws at either
+ end. If the pedal squeaks examine the springs or oil and
+ change their position slightly. Examine the pulleys over
+ which the straps work and oil or rub them on the outside
+ with soap. Broken pedal hinges may be duplicated by any
+ blacksmith; the ordinary hinges, such as can be bought at
+ hardware stores, are sometimes substituted, but they rarely
+ answer the purpose as well as the regular pedal hinge. The
+ leather flaps over the holes in the <span
+ class='pagenum'><a name="Page_189" id="Page_189"></a>[Pg
+ 189]</span>exhausters sometimes get too tight by shrinkage
+ so that they will not let the air escape readily, and
+ consequently the pedals come up slowly, often making it
+ difficult to keep the instrument sufficiently supplied with
+ power. Simply stretch the leather flaps, being careful not
+ to pull the tacks loose or tear the leather.
+ </p>
+ <p class="center smcap">
+ Sympathetic Vibrations.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ Organs, like pianos, are subject to sympathetic vibrations.
+ A reed fitting loosely in the reed chamber will sometimes
+ buzz when sounded. A bit of paper under the back end of the
+ reed will stop it. Any loose material about the instrument
+ may cause trouble of this kind. Trace up the cause and the
+ remedy will suggest itself.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ A buzzing sound may be caused by a reed's being too tight
+ in the reed chamber, causing the tongue to vibrate against
+ the sides of the brass body. In some rare cases, not being
+ firmly riveted, the tongue will move to one side, causing
+ the same trouble. Care and pains must be taken in working
+ with reeds, but when in this condition they must be
+ repaired. Tap the rivet lightly with a hammer and <span
+ class='pagenum'><a name="Page_190" id="Page_190"></a>[Pg
+ 190]</span>try it; if it still does not sound clear, catch
+ the butt of the reed (riveted end) with a pair of parallel
+ pliers, and turn it toward the center until, when
+ vibrating, it clears the jaws.
+ </p>
+ <p class="center smcap">
+ Tuning.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ The method of tuning the organ is very simple. To flatten
+ the tone of a reed, scrape the tongue near the butt or
+ rivet, making it thinner at that point, which will cause it
+ to vibrate at a slower rate. To sharpen the tone, scrape it
+ at the point, thereby lightening the vibrating end, which
+ will cause a more rapid rate of vibration. When a reed has
+ been scraped or filed so thin at the point that it will
+ bear no more scraping, it can sometimes be sharpened by
+ bending it up and down a few times, which has a tendency to
+ put temper in the metal. Some reeds are curved at the point
+ purposely to secure a certain voice. Do not interfere with
+ the proper curvature when tuning. In tuning organs, the
+ same system and general instruction given for piano tuning
+ will apply; however, it is rarely, if ever, necessary to
+ give an organ as thorough tuning as you would a piano. It
+ is a very tedious job where you have to draw each <span
+ class='pagenum'><a name="Page_191" id="Page_191"></a>[Pg
+ 191]</span>reed, apply the proper method, insert it and try
+ the result, thus cutting and trying each one perhaps
+ several times before getting the desired result. In
+ factories devices are used which render the operation very
+ much easier.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ One thing you should know is, that organs are not tempered
+ as finely as pianos, nor is there the pains taken to secure
+ perfect unisons. In fact, you can hardly find a perfect
+ unison in an organ of modern make, much less, a correct
+ temperament. Finding a tone that is so far out as to be
+ very disagreeable, adjust it between the octave below and
+ the octave above, try it in the proper chords and equalize
+ it in the best possible way; but it is not often you will
+ be able to tune it to absolute precision with its octaves.
+ It is thought by many that a slight deviation from correct
+ unisons, sufficient to give a series of waves, gives the
+ organ a more mellow voice and consequently a more musical
+ (?) tone; and while we do not agree with any such
+ proposition, it makes the tuner's work less exacting.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ We feel that an apology is in order for not giving
+ illustrations of the action of the organ, but if the
+ student will study this lesson in connection with the <span
+ class='pagenum'><a name="Page_192" id="Page_192"></a>[Pg
+ 192]</span>instrument itself, we believe he will have no
+ trouble in learning all about its mechanical action and its
+ demands upon the tuner.
+ </p>
+ <p class="center">
+ QUESTIONS ON LESSON XVI.
+ </p>
+ <ol>
+ <li>
+ Name the musical advantages possessed by the organ which
+ are absent in the piano.
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ Name the musical advantages possessed by the piano which
+ are absent in the organ.
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ Describe the mechanical operations taking place in the
+ organ when a key is being sounded.
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ State what you would do to flatten the tone of a reed and
+ give reasons.
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ State what you would do to sharpen the tone of a reed and
+ give reasons.
+ </li>
+ </ol>
+ <hr style="width: 65%;" />
+ <p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_193"
+ id="Page_193"></a>[Pg 193]</span></p>
+ <h2>
+ <a name="LESSON_XVII" id="LESSON_XVII"></a>LESSON XVII.
+ </h2>
+ <hr />
+ <h3>
+ CONCLUDING PROFESSIONAL HINTS.
+ </h3>
+ <p>
+ Peculiar incidents occur in the experience of the piano
+ tuner, some of which have come under the observation of the
+ author so frequently that he deems it advisable to mention
+ them here; there are incidents also that happen once in a
+ life-time which must be treated in their time with tact and
+ good judgment, and which it is impossible to describe here,
+ as each tuner, in his special field, will elicit new
+ developments. Occasion often requires the tuner to summon
+ all his wits and tact in order to dispose of questions put
+ to him, both by pianos and owners.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ Among the perplexing things that come to the tuner are the
+ terms used by musicians and piano owners to express certain
+ qualities of tone and certain discrepancies of the
+ instrument. We will define a number of these.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ <b>Brilliant.</b> The sense in which this term is used is
+ astonishing to one who is accustomed to <span
+ class='pagenum'><a name="Page_194" id="Page_194"></a>[Pg
+ 194]</span>using words according to their dictionary
+ meanings. We have heard persons say their piano was too
+ <i>brilliant</i>; or, that it was not <i>brilliant</i>
+ enough. They mean this term to apply to what we are pleased
+ to call the voice of the instrument. When the hammers are
+ hard, producing a sharp, penetrating tone, they call it
+ <i>brilliant</i>; when the hammers are soft and produce
+ what a trained ear would accept as a soft, sweet, musical
+ tone, some persons will say that the instrument lacks
+ brilliancy. Persons of a different taste, and, we would
+ say, a more cultured ear, call the tone <i>harsh</i> when
+ the hammers are hard, and they usually desire the tuner to
+ <i>soften</i> the tone, which he does by softening the
+ hammer ends as has been described in Lesson VII. This
+ operation, which we call voicing, is a very delicate piece
+ of work, and the tuner should exercise care and pains in
+ doing it; so we will deviate from the trend of the
+ discourse and offer a few directions here, as the previous
+ instructions are hardly complete.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ Insert the felt pick (which should contain only one point,
+ and not three or four, as they usually do) in the point of
+ the hammer and give it a rotary motion, so to speak,
+ loosening up the felt and giving it its <span
+ class='pagenum'><a name="Page_195" id="Page_195"></a>[Pg
+ 195]</span>original elasticity. Do not pick up the felt at
+ the point. This method, which is resorted to by many
+ tuners, is injurious to the hammers and really does no
+ permanent good. Another method which is very good, and a
+ very easy one, is to take your parallel pliers and squeeze
+ the felt slightly at the point. Apply the pliers at right
+ angles with the hammer (if the action of the upright, your
+ pliers will be in an upright position) and catch the hammer
+ at a depth of about three-quarters of the thickness of the
+ felt. If the hammers are very hard it may be well to use
+ both the pliers and the pick; but care must always be taken
+ not to get the hammers too soft, and extreme care must be
+ taken not to get some softer than others. Some hammers are
+ always used more than others and, of course, these will
+ need more softening. Usually those at the extreme ends of
+ the instrument will need no softening at all, but sometimes
+ the bass will bear considerable softening. After going over
+ them in the above way, try them by playing the chromatic
+ scale and you will invariably find some that need
+ additional attention. Be sure that no hard tone is left, as
+ such a condition is a great annoyance to a delicate ear.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ <span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_196"
+ id="Page_196"></a>[Pg 196]</span>
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ <b>Singing.</b> When a damper is out of order and does not
+ do its work properly, they often say the tone <i>sings</i>.
+ They say the same thing about the reed organ when a pallet
+ sticks or a key stays down. Sometimes this term is used to
+ express the grating vibration which has been treated under
+ the head of <i>sympathetic rattle</i>.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ <b>Tin-panny.</b> This term is often used and generally
+ means that the instrument is out of tune, and especially
+ that the unisons are out. Sometimes it is used to express a
+ <i>hollow</i> quality of tone; but you will rarely, if
+ ever, hear a piano spoken of in this way if it is in
+ correct tune. Any piano out of tune badly may be said to
+ sound tin-panny.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ <b>Bass-ey.</b> This term expresses a very harsh bass.
+ Imperfect octaves or unisons in the bass of a piano give
+ rise to the use of this term. If the bass of the instrument
+ is decidedly flat, the same term is sometimes used to
+ express the condition.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ <b>Harsh.</b> This term, when it does not apply to the
+ voice of the piano, generally reflects upon the work of the
+ tuner (?). Chords are <i>harsh</i> when they contain
+ over-sharp thirds, bad fifths, octaves, etc. Take care that
+ your temperament contains no bad <span class='pagenum'><a
+ name="Page_197" id="Page_197"></a>[Pg 197]</span>chords,
+ and after you are all through, see that all tones have
+ stood, and that you have left no bad unisons or octaves.
+ One or two carelessly tuned <ins class="corr" title="tonse appears in the original">tones</ins> may disparage your
+ otherwise creditable work.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ <b>Questions.</b> Questions are often asked the tuner
+ concerning the care of the piano. Be prepared to answer any
+ reasonable question that may come up, which your knowledge
+ of the instrument should enable you to do. In regard to
+ temperature, moisture, etc., an extreme either way is the
+ thing to avoid. A very dry or hot atmosphere will crack the
+ varnish, warp the wooden parts, crack the sound-board,
+ cause parts to come unglued, etc. On the other hand, too
+ much moisture will rust the steel parts, strings, etc.; so
+ the "happy medium" is the condition to be desired. As to
+ keeping pianos closed, a question you will often be asked,
+ we think it is better to keep them open at all times than
+ to keep them closed at all times; because, if they are kept
+ open they are subjected to the changes of the atmosphere,
+ which will rarely permit the piano to become either very
+ damp or too dry. In a word, a room that is healthy for
+ human beings is all right for the piano.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ <span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_198"
+ id="Page_198"></a>[Pg 198]</span>
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ <b>Seasons for Tuning.</b> The prevalent idea in regard to
+ this matter is that pianos should be tuned either at the
+ beginning of cold or of warm weather. In our experience, we
+ have found that it makes no difference when the piano is
+ tuned if it is kept in the living room. If, however, a
+ piano were tuned upon a warm day in the fall and then
+ allowed to remain in a room in which the temperature
+ suddenly fell to zero, we could not expect it to stand in
+ tune; and much less, if the room is heated up occasionally
+ and then left for an interval at the mercy of the weather.
+ Persons who treat their pianos in this way should have them
+ tuned about four times a year.
+ </p>
+ <hr style="width: 65%;" />
+ <div class="footnotes">
+ <h3>
+ FOOTNOTES
+ </h3>
+ <div class="footnote">
+ <p>
+ <a id="fn_A" name="fn_A"></a><a
+ href="#fnanchor_A"><span class="label">[A]</span></a>
+ Published by Theodore Presser, Philadelphia, Pa.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ <a id="fn_B" name="fn_B"></a><a
+ href="#fnanchor_B"><span class="label">[B]</span></a>
+ There are two sections of the lower bridge, one for the
+ treble and one for the overstrung bass.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ <a id="fn_C" name="fn_C"></a><a
+ href="#fnanchor_C"><span class="label">[C]</span></a>
+ The three strings composing the trio or unison are
+ numbered 1st, 2d or middle, and 3d, from left to right.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ <a id="fn_D" name="fn_D"></a><a
+ href="#fnanchor_D"><span class="label">[D]</span></a>
+ The chromatic scale is a succession of all the half
+ steps in the compass of one octave. Counting the octave
+ tone, it contains thirteen tones, but we speak of
+ twelve, as there are only twelve which differ in name.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ <a id="fn_E" name="fn_E"></a><a
+ href="#fnanchor_E"><span class="label">[E]</span></a>
+ In making these suggestions, no calculation is made for
+ the liability of the tones tuned to fall. This often
+ happens, in which case your first test will display a
+ sharp third. In cases like this it is best to go on
+ through, taking pains to temper carefully, and go all
+ over the temperament again, giving all the strings an
+ equal chance to fall. If the piano is very bad, you may
+ have to bring up the unisons roughly, inuring this
+ portion of the instrument to the increased tension,
+ when you may again place your continuous mute and set
+ your temperament with more certainty.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ <a id="fn_F" name="fn_F"></a><a
+ href="#fnanchor_F"><span class="label">[F]</span></a>
+ Bear in mind, the foregoing and following instructions
+ are written with reference to the upright piano. The
+ square does not permit the observance of these
+ suggestions so favorably as the upright.
+ </p>
+ <p>
+ <a id="fn_G" name="fn_G"></a><a
+ href="#fnanchor_G"><span class="label">[G]</span></a>
+ When the bushing of the center-pin of the hammer butt
+ becomes badly worn or the hammer-flange becomes loose,
+ or the condition of the hammer or flange becomes so
+ impaired that the hammer has too much play, it may so
+ strike the strings as to tend to produce the phenomenon
+ described in the above paragraph. When in such a
+ condition, one side of the hammer may strike in advance
+ of the other just enough to throw the vibrations in
+ opposition. Once you may get a strong tone, and again
+ you strike with the same force and hear but a faint,
+ almost inaudible sound. For this reason, as well as
+ that of preventing excessive wear, the hammer joint
+ should be kept firm and rigid.
+ </p>
+ </div>
+ </div>
+ <hr style="width: 65%;" />
+ <p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_199"
+ id="Page_199"></a>[Pg 199]</span></p>
+ <h2>
+ <a name="INDEX" id="INDEX"></a>INDEX.
+ </h2>
+ <hr />
+ <ul>
+ <li>
+ Action, <a href="#Page_017">17</a>
+ <ul>
+ <li>
+ brackets, <a href="#Page_024">24</a>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ of grand piano, <a href="#Page_037">37</a>, <a
+ href="#Page_038">38</a>, <a href="#Page_062">62</a>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ of square piano, <a href="#Page_032">32</a>, <a
+ href="#Page_034">34</a>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ removing, square and grand, <a
+ href="#Page_038">38</a>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ replacing, square and grand, <a
+ href="#Page_039">39</a>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ requisites of, <a href="#Page_017">17</a>, <a
+ href="#Page_018">18</a>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ top, of square piano, <a href="#Page_034">34</a>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ trap, of square piano, <a href="#Page_019">19</a>, <a
+ href="#Page_034">34</a>
+ </li>
+ </ul>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ Advantages of two-octave temperament, <a
+ href="#Page_171">171</a>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ Ancient instruments, <a href="#Page_013">13</a>
+ </li>
+ <li class="break">
+ Back check, adjustment of, <a href="#Page_049">49</a>
+ <ul>
+ <li>
+ and back catch, <a href="#Page_018">18</a>, <a
+ href="#Page_027">27</a>, <a href="#Page_028">28</a>,
+ <a href="#Page_033">33</a>, <a
+ href="#Page_037">37</a>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ wire, <a href="#Page_027">27</a>
+ </li>
+ </ul>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ Balance pin, <a href="#Page_021">21</a>
+ <ul>
+ <li>
+ rail, <a href="#Page_021">21</a>
+ </li>
+ </ul>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ Bearing bar, <a href="#Page_017">17</a>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ Beats, waves, and pulsations, <a href="#Page_073">73</a>,
+ <a href="#Page_150">150</a>
+ <ul>
+ <li>
+ of unison, octave, and major third, <a
+ href="#Page_154">154</a>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ cause of, <a href="#Page_077">77</a>, <a
+ href="#Page_150">150</a>
+ </li>
+ </ul>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ Black lead, use of, <a href="#Page_064">64</a>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ Block rail, <a href="#Page_027">27</a>, <a
+ href="#Page_051">51</a>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ Bottom or capstan, adjustment of, <a
+ href="#Page_048">48</a>, <a href="#Page_099">99</a>
+ <ul>
+ <li>
+ or key rocker, <a href="#Page_023">23</a>, <a
+ href="#Page_033">33</a>, <a href="#Page_048">48</a>,
+ <a href="#Page_056">56</a>, <a
+ href="#Page_057">57</a>
+ </li>
+ </ul>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ Bracket bolts, <a href="#Page_025">25</a>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ Bridle, <a href="#Page_028">28</a>
+ <ul>
+ <li>
+ putting in new, <a href="#Page_050">50</a>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ wire, <a href="#Page_028">28</a>, <a
+ href="#Page_050">50</a>
+ </li>
+ </ul>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ Bridges, <a href="#Page_016">16</a>, <a
+ href="#Page_017">17</a>
+ <ul>
+ <li>
+ split, <a href="#Page_173">173</a>
+ </li>
+ </ul>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ Building of upright piano, <a href="#Page_016">16</a>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ Butts, <a href="#Page_028">28</a>
+ <ul>
+ <li>
+ and flanges, repairing of, <a href="#Page_059">59</a>
+ </li>
+ </ul>
+ </li>
+ <li class="break">
+ Capstan, <a href="#Page_024">24</a>, <a
+ href="#Page_048">48</a>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ Cause of beats <a href="#Page_027">27</a>, <a
+ href="#Page_150">150</a>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ Center-pins, <a href="#Page_025">25</a>
+ <ul>
+ <li>
+ putting in new <a href="#Page_052">52</a>
+ </li>
+ </ul>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ Clicks at release of key, <a href="#Page_051">51</a>, <a
+ href="#Page_052">52</a>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ Compromises, the, <a href="#Page_099">99</a>, <a
+ href="#Page_100">100</a>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ Continuous mute, <a href="#Page_089">89</a>
+ </li>
+ <li class="break">
+ Damper lever, <a href="#Page_029">29</a>
+ <ul>
+ <li>
+ felt, softening, <a href="#Page_054">54</a>
+ </li>
+ </ul>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ Damper, of grand piano, <a href="#Page_037">37</a>
+ <ul>
+ <li>
+ of square piano, <a href="#Page_036">36</a>, <a
+ href="#Page_060">60</a>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ rod, <a href="#Page_030">30</a>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ rod, squeaking of, <a href="#Page_055">55</a>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ spoon, <a href="#Page_029">29</a>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ springs broken, <a href="#Page_054">54</a>
+ </li>
+ </ul>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ Dampers, <a href="#Page_018">18</a>, <a
+ href="#Page_029">29</a>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ Damping, defective, <a href="#Page_054">54</a>, <a
+ href="#Page_060">60</a>, <a href="#Page_061">61</a>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ Ditonic comma <a href="#Page_144">144</a>
+ </li>
+ <li class="break">
+ Evolution of the piano, <a href="#Page_012">12</a>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ Extension, <a href="#Page_023">23</a>
+ </li>
+ <li class="break">
+ False waves, <a href="#Page_160">160</a>, <a
+ href="#Page_161">161</a>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ Fifths, beats of, <a href="#Page_079">79</a>
+ <ul>
+ <li>
+ not all tempered alike, <a href="#Page_105">105</a>,
+ <a href="#Page_106">106</a>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ tempering of, <a href="#Page_079">79</a>, <a
+ href="#Page_104">104</a>
+ </li>
+ </ul>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ Final inspection, <a href="#Page_172">172</a>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ Fischer System of temperament, diagram of, <a
+ href="#Page_082">82</a>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ Flanges, <a href="#Page_025">25</a>
+ <ul>
+ <li>
+ repairing of, <a href="#Page_059">59</a>
+ </li>
+ </ul>
+ </li>
+ <li class="break">
+ Guide pins, <a href="#Page_023">23</a>
+ </li>
+ <li class="break">
+ Hammer, butt, refelting, <a href="#Page_051">51</a>
+ <ul>
+ <li>
+ capping with buckskin, <a href="#Page_059">59</a>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ felts, cleaning, <a href="#Page_034">34</a>
+ <ul>
+ <li>
+ gluing, <a href="#Page_054">54</a>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ hardening, <a href="#Page_054">54</a>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ softening, <a href="#Page_054">54</a>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ trimming, <a href="#Page_060">60</a>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ voicing, <a href="#Page_054">54</a>, <a
+ href="#Page_104">104</a>
+ </li>
+ </ul>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ head <a href="#Page_029">29</a>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ rail, <a href="#Page_029">29</a>, <a
+ href="#Page_033">33</a>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ shank or stem, <a href="#Page_029">29</a>, <a
+ href="#Page_053">53</a>
+ <ul>
+ <li>
+ broken, <a href="#Page_063">63</a>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ renewing, <a href="#Page_053">53</a>
+ </li>
+ </ul>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ spring, <a href="#Page_052">52</a>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ sticking, <a href="#Page_052">52</a>
+ </li>
+ </ul>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ Hitch-pins, <a href="#Page_016">16</a>, <a
+ href="#Page_017">17</a>
+ </li>
+ <li class="break">
+ Instrumental attachments, removal of, <a
+ href="#Page_118">118</a>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ Intervals flattened, <a href="#Page_157">157</a>
+ <ul>
+ <li>
+ sharpened, <a href="#Page_157">157</a>
+ </li>
+ </ul>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ Ivories, regluing, <a href="#Page_064">64</a> <span
+ class='pagenum'><a name="Page_200" id="Page_200"></a>[Pg
+ 200]</span>
+ </li>
+ <li class="break">
+ Jack, <a href="#Page_026">26</a>
+ <ul>
+ <li>
+ repairing of, <a href="#Page_050">50</a>, <a
+ href="#Page_058">58</a>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ sluggish, <a href="#Page_057">57</a>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ -spring broken, <a href="#Page_058">58</a>
+ </li>
+ </ul>
+ </li>
+ <li class="break">
+ Key, defects in, <a href="#Page_047">47</a>, <a
+ href="#Page_048">48</a>
+ <ul>
+ <li>
+ leads, <a href="#Page_022">22</a>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ organ, sticking, <a href="#Page_185">185</a>, <a
+ href="#Page_186">186</a>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ removing, square piano, <a href="#Page_056">56</a>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ squeaking, <a href="#Page_064">64</a>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ sticking, <a href="#Page_046">46</a>
+ </li>
+ </ul>
+ </li>
+ <li class="break">
+ Lead, in keys, <a href="#Page_022">22</a>
+ <ul>
+ <li>
+ black, use of, <a href="#Page_064">64</a>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ loose in key, <a href="#Page_064">64</a>
+ </li>
+ </ul>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ Length, tension, and weight of strings, <a
+ href="#Page_075">75</a>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ Loud pedal, <a href="#Page_019">19</a>, <a
+ href="#Page_030">30</a>
+ </li>
+ <li class="break">
+ Main rail, <a href="#Page_025">25</a>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ Mathematics of tempered scale, <a
+ href="#Page_126">126</a>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ Metal plates, <a href="#Page_015">15</a>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ Mute, continuous, <a href="#Page_089">89</a>, <a
+ href="#Page_090">90</a>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ Mutes, setting in upright piano, <a
+ href="#Page_117">117</a>-<a href="#Page_120">120</a>
+ <ul>
+ <li>
+ in bass, <a href="#Page_121">121</a>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ beyond temperament, <a href="#Page_120">120</a>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ in square piano, <a href="#Page_122">122</a>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ on nodal points, <a href="#Page_161">161</a>
+ </li>
+ </ul>
+ </li>
+ <li class="break">
+ Octave, dividing into major thirds, <a
+ href="#Page_134">134</a>
+ <ul>
+ <li>
+ into minor thirds, <a href="#Page_140">140</a>
+ <ul>
+ <li>
+ perfect fifths, <a href="#Page_142">142</a>
+ </li>
+ </ul>
+ </li>
+ </ul>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ Octaves, relative vibration of, <a
+ href="#Page_078">78</a>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ Organ, reed, tuning and repairing the, <a
+ href="#Page_178">178</a>
+ <ul>
+ <li>
+ bellows, leaks in, <a href="#Page_187">187</a>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ capabilities of, <a href="#Page_179">179</a>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ cleaning, <a href="#Page_180">180</a>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ examination, <a href="#Page_183">183</a>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ keys sticking, <a href="#Page_185">185</a>, <a
+ href="#Page_186">186</a>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ pallets, <a href="#Page_186">186</a>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ pedal defects, <a href="#Page_188">188</a>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ reeds, to find, <a href="#Page_184">184</a>
+ <ul>
+ <li>
+ tuning, <a href="#Page_190">190</a>
+ </li>
+ </ul>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ stops, <a href="#Page_182">182</a>
+ <ul>
+ <li>
+ disconnected, <a href="#Page_184">184</a>
+ </li>
+ </ul>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ sympathetic vibration, <a href="#Page_189">189</a>
+ </li>
+ </ul>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ Over-tension, <a href="#Page_114">114</a>
+ </li>
+ <li class="break">
+ Panel, removing of, <a href="#Page_075">75</a>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ Parts of grand action, <a href="#Page_038">38</a>
+ <ul>
+ <li>
+ of square action, <a href="#Page_034">34</a>
+ </li>
+ </ul>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ Pendulum to aid in judgment of a second of time, <a
+ href="#Page_104">104</a>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ Piano frame, <a href="#Page_015">15</a>
+ <ul>
+ <li>
+ tuner, requisites of, <a href="#Page_007">7</a>, <a
+ href="#Page_070">70</a>
+ </li>
+ </ul>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ Pianos, special use of, <a href="#Page_085">85</a>, <a
+ href="#Page_086">86</a>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ Pitch, concert, <a href="#Page_127">127</a>
+ <ul>
+ <li>
+ international, <a href="#Page_081">81</a>, <a
+ href="#Page_127">127</a>
+ </li>
+ </ul>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ Pitch, left to tuner's judgment, <a
+ href="#Page_086">86</a>, <a href="#Page_087">87</a>, <a
+ href="#Page_089">89</a>
+ <ul>
+ <li>
+ to determine most favorable, <a
+ href="#Page_085">85</a>
+ </li>
+ </ul>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ Professional hints, <a href="#Page_193">193</a>
+ </li>
+ <li class="break">
+ Questions asked by owners, <a href="#Page_197">197</a>
+ </li>
+ <li class="break">
+ Ratio of intervals, <a href="#Page_132">132</a>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ Reed organ. See <i>Organ</i>.
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ Regulating button, <a href="#Page_026">26</a>, <a
+ href="#Page_051">51</a>
+ <ul>
+ <li>
+ rail, <a href="#Page_026">26</a>, <a
+ href="#Page_036">36</a>
+ </li>
+ </ul>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ Repairing small wooden parts, <a href="#Page_063">63</a>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ Repetition of stroke, <a href="#Page_018">18</a>, <a
+ href="#Page_027">27</a>
+ </li>
+ <li class="break">
+ Searching for articles on sound board, <a
+ href="#Page_044">44</a>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ Seasons for tuning, <a href="#Page_198">198</a>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ Soft pedal, <a href="#Page_029">29</a>, <a
+ href="#Page_036">36</a>, <a href="#Page_038">38</a>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ Sound board, <a href="#Page_016">16</a>
+ <ul>
+ <li style="display: none;">
+ <ul>
+ <li>
+ split, <a href="#Page_044">44</a>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ unglued, <a href="#Page_045">45</a>
+ </li>
+ </ul>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ waves, interference of, <a href="#Page_078">78</a>,
+ <a href="#Page_150">150</a>
+ </li>
+ </ul>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ Splicing piano wire, <a href="#Page_176">176</a>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ Spring rail, <a href="#Page_029">29</a>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ Stringing of upright, <a href="#Page_016">16</a>, <a
+ href="#Page_017">17</a>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ Strings growing sharper, <a href="#Page_088">88</a>
+ <ul>
+ <li>
+ putting in new, <a href="#Page_174">174</a>, <a
+ href="#Page_175">175</a>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ rendering through bridges, <a
+ href="#Page_112">112</a>, <a href="#Page_114">114</a>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ splicing, <a href="#Page_176">176</a>
+ </li>
+ </ul>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ Study and practice of tuning, <a href="#Page_066">66</a>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ Sustaining pedal, <a href="#Page_030">30</a>
+ <ul>
+ <li>
+ squeaking of, <a href="#Page_055">55</a>
+ </li>
+ </ul>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ Sympathetic rattle, <a href="#Page_043">43</a>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ Syntonic comma, <a href="#Page_132">132</a>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ Systems of temperament, various, <a
+ href="#Page_163">163</a>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ System A, <a href="#Page_165">165</a>
+ <ul>
+ <li>
+ B, <a href="#Page_166">166</a>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ C, <a href="#Page_167">167</a>, <a
+ href="#Page_168">168</a>
+ </li>
+ </ul>
+ </li>
+ <li class="break">
+ Tables of relative string length, <a
+ href="#Page_131">131</a>, <a href="#Page_136">136</a>, <a
+ href="#Page_140">140</a>, <a href="#Page_143">143</a>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ Temperament, advantages of the two-octave, <a
+ href="#Page_171">171</a>
+ <ul>
+ <li>
+ equal, <a href="#Page_097">97</a>, <a
+ href="#Page_144">144</a>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ Fischer system, <a href="#Page_074">74</a>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ finishing up, <a href="#Page_156">156</a>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ introductory remarks on, <a href="#Page_068">68</a>,
+ <a href="#Page_072">72</a>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ rationale of, <a href="#Page_128">128</a>, <a
+ href="#Page_139">139</a>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ requisites of, <a href="#Page_133">133</a>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ setting, specific instructions, <a
+ href="#Page_085">85</a>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ theory of, <a href="#Page_097">97</a>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ unequal, <a href="#Page_098">98</a>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ various systems, <a href="#Page_163">163</a>-<a
+ href="#Page_168">168</a>
+ </li>
+ </ul>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ Tension, equalization of, <a href="#Page_111">111</a>, <a
+ href="#Page_112">112</a>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ Terms to express tone qualities, <a
+ href="#Page_193">193</a>-<a href="#Page_196">196</a>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ Testing by thirds and tenths, <a href="#Page_170">170</a>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ Tests, chords, <a href="#Page_094">94</a>, <a
+ href="#Page_099">99</a>, <a href="#Page_103">103</a>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ Third, excessive sharpness of, <a
+ href="#Page_095">95</a>, <a href="#Page_103">103</a>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ Thirds, major, <a href="#Page_135">135</a>
+ <ul>
+ <li>
+ major, sharper than perfect, <a
+ href="#Page_135">135</a>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ minor, flatter than perfect, <a
+ href="#Page_141">141</a>
+ </li>
+ </ul>
+ <span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_201"
+ id="Page_201"></a>[Pg 201]</span>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ Tones, harmonic, <a href="#Page_120">120</a>, <a
+ href="#Page_130">130</a>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ Touch, altering the, <a href="#Page_048">48</a>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ Treble, extreme, sharper than perfect, <a
+ href="#Page_159">159</a>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ Tuning, instructions for first experiments in, <a
+ href="#Page_092">92</a>-<a href="#Page_095">95</a>
+ <ul>
+ <li>
+ hammer, manipulation of, <a href="#Page_110">110</a>,
+ <a href="#Page_115">115</a>, <a
+ href="#Page_116">116</a>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ pins, marking of in square, <a
+ href="#Page_122">122</a>
+ <ul>
+ <li>
+ loose, <a href="#Page_173">173</a>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ setting of, <a href="#Page_112">112</a>-<a
+ href="#Page_114">114</a>
+ </li>
+ </ul>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ the bass, <a href="#Page_160">160</a>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ the treble, <a href="#Page_157">157</a>, <a
+ href="#Page_159">159</a>
+ </li>
+ </ul>
+ </li>
+ <li class="break">
+ Vibration numbers, comparison of, <a
+ href="#Page_137">137</a>, <a href="#Page_146">146</a>, <a
+ href="#Page_147">147</a>, <a href="#Page_148">148</a>
+ </li>
+ <li class="break">
+ Watchmaker's screwdriver, use of in piano repairing, <a
+ href="#Page_063">63</a>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ Wippen, <a href="#Page_025">25</a>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ Wire splicing, <a href="#Page_176">176</a>
+ </li>
+ <li>
+ Wooden parts, shrinking, rattling, <a
+ href="#Page_059">59</a>
+ <ul>
+ <li>
+ repairing of small, <a href="#Page_063">63</a>
+ </li>
+ </ul>
+ </li>
+ </ul>
+ <div class="footnotes">
+ <h3>
+ Transcriber's Note
+ </h3>
+ <div class="footnote">
+ <p>
+ On page 197, 'tones' has been misspelt in the original text as 'tonse'.
+ </p>
+ </div>
+ </div>
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+<pre>
+
+
+
+
+
+End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of Piano Tuning, by J. Cree Fischer
+
+*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK PIANO TUNING ***
+
+***** This file should be named 17571-h.htm or 17571-h.zip *****
+This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
+ http://www.gutenberg.org/1/7/5/7/17571/
+
+Produced by Mark C. Orton, L.N. Yaddanapudi and the Online
+Distributed Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net
+
+
+Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions
+will be renamed.
+
+Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
+one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
+(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
+permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules,
+set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
+copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
+protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project
+Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
+charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you
+do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
+rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
+such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
+research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
+practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is
+subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
+redistribution.
+
+
+
+*** START: FULL LICENSE ***
+
+THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
+PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
+
+To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
+distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
+(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at
+http://gutenberg.org/license).
+
+
+Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic works
+
+1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
+and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
+(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all
+the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
+all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
+If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
+terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
+entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
+
+1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be
+used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
+agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few
+things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
+even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See
+paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
+and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works. See paragraph 1.E below.
+
+1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation"
+or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the
+collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an
+individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
+located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
+copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
+works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
+are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
+Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
+freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
+this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
+the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
+keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.
+
+1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
+what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in
+a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check
+the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
+before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
+creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
+Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning
+the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
+States.
+
+1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
+
+1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
+access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
+whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
+phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
+copied or distributed:
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
+from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
+posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
+and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
+or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
+with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the
+work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
+through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
+Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
+1.E.9.
+
+1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
+with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
+must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
+terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked
+to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
+permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
+
+1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
+work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
+
+1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
+electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
+prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
+active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm License.
+
+1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
+compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
+word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or
+distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
+"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version
+posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org),
+you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
+copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
+request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other
+form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
+
+1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
+performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
+unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
+
+1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
+access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
+that
+
+- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
+ the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
+ you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is
+ owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
+ has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
+ Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments
+ must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
+ prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
+ returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
+ sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
+ address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to
+ the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
+
+- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
+ you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
+ does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+ License. You must require such a user to return or
+ destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
+ and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
+ Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
+ money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
+ electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
+ of receipt of the work.
+
+- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
+ distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
+forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
+both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
+Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the
+Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.
+
+1.F.
+
+1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
+effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
+public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
+collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
+"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
+corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
+property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
+computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
+your equipment.
+
+1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
+of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
+liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
+fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
+LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
+PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
+TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
+LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
+INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
+DAMAGE.
+
+1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
+defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
+receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
+written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you
+received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
+your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with
+the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
+refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
+providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
+receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy
+is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
+opportunities to fix the problem.
+
+1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
+in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER
+WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
+WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
+
+1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
+warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
+If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
+law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
+interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
+the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any
+provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
+
+1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
+trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
+providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
+with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
+promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
+harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
+that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
+or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
+work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
+Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
+
+
+Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
+electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
+including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists
+because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
+people in all walks of life.
+
+Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
+assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
+goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
+remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
+and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
+To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
+and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
+and the Foundation web page at http://www.pglaf.org.
+
+
+Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
+Foundation
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
+501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
+state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
+Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
+number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at
+http://pglaf.org/fundraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
+permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
+
+The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
+Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
+throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at
+809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email
+business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact
+information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official
+page at http://pglaf.org
+
+For additional contact information:
+ Dr. Gregory B. Newby
+ Chief Executive and Director
+ gbnewby@pglaf.org
+
+
+Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
+spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
+increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
+freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
+array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations
+($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
+status with the IRS.
+
+The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
+charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
+States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
+considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
+with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations
+where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To
+SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
+particular state visit http://pglaf.org
+
+While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
+have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
+against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
+approach us with offers to donate.
+
+International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
+any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
+outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
+
+Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
+methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other
+ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations.
+To donate, please visit: http://pglaf.org/donate
+
+
+Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.
+
+Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm
+concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
+with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project
+Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
+
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
+editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
+unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily
+keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
+
+
+Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:
+
+ http://www.gutenberg.org
+
+This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
+including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
+Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
+subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
+
+
+</pre>
+
+ </body>
+</html>
diff --git a/17571-h/images/image016.jpg b/17571-h/images/image016.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..60f1b54
--- /dev/null
+++ b/17571-h/images/image016.jpg
Binary files differ
diff --git a/17571-h/images/image020.jpg b/17571-h/images/image020.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..540bf4f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/17571-h/images/image020.jpg
Binary files differ
diff --git a/17571-h/images/image035.png b/17571-h/images/image035.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a69cc03
--- /dev/null
+++ b/17571-h/images/image035.png
Binary files differ
diff --git a/17571-h/images/image039.png b/17571-h/images/image039.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5345e5d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/17571-h/images/image039.png
Binary files differ
diff --git a/17571-h/images/image082.png b/17571-h/images/image082.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e397bba
--- /dev/null
+++ b/17571-h/images/image082.png
Binary files differ
diff --git a/17571-h/images/image119.jpg b/17571-h/images/image119.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9834ecf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/17571-h/images/image119.jpg
Binary files differ
diff --git a/17571-h/images/image120.jpg b/17571-h/images/image120.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e96d971
--- /dev/null
+++ b/17571-h/images/image120.jpg
Binary files differ
diff --git a/17571-h/images/image121.jpg b/17571-h/images/image121.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..fae0ae9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/17571-h/images/image121.jpg
Binary files differ
diff --git a/17571-h/images/image136.jpg b/17571-h/images/image136.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5e1997d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/17571-h/images/image136.jpg
Binary files differ
diff --git a/17571-h/images/image137.png b/17571-h/images/image137.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9974a58
--- /dev/null
+++ b/17571-h/images/image137.png
Binary files differ
diff --git a/17571-h/images/image176.png b/17571-h/images/image176.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5398ba3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/17571-h/images/image176.png
Binary files differ
diff --git a/17571-h/images/imagetitle.png b/17571-h/images/imagetitle.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d58b326
--- /dev/null
+++ b/17571-h/images/imagetitle.png
Binary files differ
diff --git a/17571-h/images/original020.jpg b/17571-h/images/original020.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9ec11fb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/17571-h/images/original020.jpg
Binary files differ
diff --git a/17571-h/images/original035.jpg b/17571-h/images/original035.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2caca6f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/17571-h/images/original035.jpg
Binary files differ
diff --git a/17571-h/images/original039.jpg b/17571-h/images/original039.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..30075a0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/17571-h/images/original039.jpg
Binary files differ